[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2011040479A1 - Optical unit, projection image display device, and diffusion optical element - Google Patents

Optical unit, projection image display device, and diffusion optical element Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011040479A1
WO2011040479A1 PCT/JP2010/066971 JP2010066971W WO2011040479A1 WO 2011040479 A1 WO2011040479 A1 WO 2011040479A1 JP 2010066971 W JP2010066971 W JP 2010066971W WO 2011040479 A1 WO2011040479 A1 WO 2011040479A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
light
diffusion
projection
light source
unit
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2010/066971
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
倫弘 奥田
梓 竹内
勇輝 田之畑
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sanyo Electric Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Sanyo Electric Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2009224666A external-priority patent/JP2011075651A/en
Priority claimed from JP2010041051A external-priority patent/JP2011100093A/en
Priority claimed from JP2010042957A external-priority patent/JP2011180281A/en
Application filed by Sanyo Electric Co Ltd filed Critical Sanyo Electric Co Ltd
Priority to US13/376,704 priority Critical patent/US20120086917A1/en
Priority to CN2010800250990A priority patent/CN102472955A/en
Publication of WO2011040479A1 publication Critical patent/WO2011040479A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N9/00Details of colour television systems
    • H04N9/12Picture reproducers
    • H04N9/31Projection devices for colour picture display, e.g. using electronic spatial light modulators [ESLM]
    • H04N9/3141Constructional details thereof
    • H04N9/315Modulator illumination systems
    • H04N9/3161Modulator illumination systems using laser light sources
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/48Laser speckle optics
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B21/00Projectors or projection-type viewers; Accessories therefor
    • G03B21/005Projectors using an electronic spatial light modulator but not peculiar thereto
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N9/00Details of colour television systems
    • H04N9/12Picture reproducers
    • H04N9/31Projection devices for colour picture display, e.g. using electronic spatial light modulators [ESLM]
    • H04N9/3129Projection devices for colour picture display, e.g. using electronic spatial light modulators [ESLM] scanning a light beam on the display screen

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an optical unit including a light source that emits coherent light, a projection display apparatus, and a diffusion optical element that diffuses coherent light.
  • a projection display apparatus having a light source, a light modulation element that modulates light emitted from the light source, and a projection unit that projects light emitted from the light modulation element onto a projection surface is known.
  • Speckle noise is noise generated when image light emitted from the projection unit is scattered on the projection surface and the scattered light interferes.
  • the following technique has been proposed.
  • the first method is a method of diffusing laser light by a disk-shaped diffusion plate that rotates around a rotation axis parallel to the traveling direction of the laser light (for example, Patent Document 1).
  • the second method is a method of diffusing laser light with two diffusion plates (for example, Patent Document 2).
  • a diffusing plate is used to reduce speckle noise.
  • the laser light is diffused by the diffusing plate, the brightness of the light projected on the projection surface is lowered. That is, the effect of removing speckle noise and the luminance of the image displayed on the projection surface have a trade-off relationship.
  • a projection display apparatus includes a light source (light source unit 110) that emits coherent light, a light modulation element (DMD 500) that modulates light emitted from the light source, and the light.
  • a projection unit projection unit 150 that projects the light emitted from the modulation element onto the projection surface.
  • the projection display apparatus includes a speckle noise reduction element provided between the light source and the light modulation element, and a control unit (control unit 800) that controls the first mode and the second mode. The control unit controls the speckle noise reduction element so that speckle is reduced in the first mode than in the second mode.
  • a projection display apparatus includes a light source (light source unit 110) that emits coherent light, a light modulation element (DMD 500) that modulates light emitted from the light source, and the light.
  • a projection unit projection unit 150 that projects the light emitted from the modulation element onto the projection surface.
  • the projection display apparatus is provided between the light source and the light modulation element, and diffuses light emitted from the light source and diffuses light emitted from the light source (diffusion optical element).
  • the control unit controls the diffusing optical element so as to diffuse light emitted from the light source in the first mode with a higher diffusivity than in the second mode.
  • the diffusion optical element has a plurality of diffusion surfaces in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source.
  • the control unit controls the diffusion optical element so that the plurality of diffusion surfaces operate with different operation patterns.
  • the diffusion optical element includes a first rotating body that rotates about a first rotation axis, a second rotating body that rotates about a second rotation axis that is parallel to the first rotation axis, and A strip-shaped diffusion sheet wound in an endless loop around the first rotating body and the second rotating body.
  • the strip-shaped diffusion sheet constitutes two diffusion surfaces in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source.
  • the controller controls the diffusing optical element such that two diffusing surfaces move in opposite directions with the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.
  • control unit controls the diffusion optical element so that when one diffusion surface of the plurality of diffusion surfaces stops, the other diffusion surface moves.
  • the diffusing optical element includes a first diffusing plate and a second diffusing plate.
  • the control unit controls the diffusion optical element so that the first diffusion plate and the second diffusion plate vibrate along different directions.
  • the diffusion optical element has a plurality of diffusion regions having different diffusivities.
  • the control unit controls the diffusing optical element so as to diffuse light emitted from the light source by using a diffusion region having a lower diffusivity than the diffusion region used in the first mode. To do.
  • the diffusing optical element diffuses coherent light and transmits coherent light.
  • the diffusion optical element includes: a first rotating body that rotates about a first rotating shaft; a second rotating body that rotates about a second rotating shaft that is parallel to the first rotating shaft; the first rotating body; A belt-shaped diffusion sheet wound in an endless loop around the second rotating body.
  • the strip-shaped diffusion sheet constitutes two diffusion surfaces that move in opposite directions.
  • a projection display apparatus includes a light source (light source unit 110) that emits coherent light, a light modulation element (DMD 500) that modulates light emitted from the light source, and the light.
  • a projection unit projection unit 150 that projects light emitted from the modulation element onto a projection plane, and relays the light emitted from the light source so that the light emitted from the light source is applied to the light modulation element.
  • a relay optical system for example, lens 21W, lens 23, lens 40.
  • the projection display apparatus includes a uniformizing optical element (for example, a diffusing optical element 600) that uniformizes the spatial distribution of the light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit.
  • the uniformizing optical element is provided between the light source and the light modulation element, and diffuses light emitted from the light source and transmits light emitted from the light source.
  • the diffusing optical element includes a central region including an optical axis center emitted from the light source, and a peripheral region provided around the central region. The diffusivity of the central region is greater than the diffusivity of the peripheral region.
  • the projection display apparatus further includes a control unit (control unit 800) for controlling the uniformizing optical element so as to operate in a predetermined operation pattern.
  • the diffusing optical element according to the fifth feature has a diffusing region that diffuses coherent light and diffuses coherent light.
  • the diffusion region includes a central region including an optical axis center of coherent light and a peripheral region provided around the central region. The diffusivity of the central region is greater than the diffusivity of the peripheral region.
  • the optical unit according to the sixth feature includes a pair of lens arrays (incident side microlens array 310 and exit side microlens array 312) and vibration that vibrates the pair of lens arrays. And providing means.
  • the vibration may be a movement that periodically changes within a predetermined range, and includes a linear movement, rotation, swinging, and the like.
  • speckle noise can be reduced, and an increase in the divergence angle of incident light can be suppressed.
  • the pair of lens arrays includes a first lens array having a focal length f (incident side microlens array 310), a second lens array having a focal length f ′, and an outgoing side microlens array. 312), and when a medium having an absolute refractive index n is interposed between the first lens array and the second lens array, the first lens array and the second lens array , Approximately (f + f ′) / n.
  • the distance between the first lens array and the second lens array may be approximately 2f / n. If it is air, it is sufficient to have an interval of approximately f + f ′.
  • a projection display apparatus (projection display apparatus 100) according to the seventh feature includes a light source unit (light source unit 110) configured by a coherent light source and an optical axis of light emitted from the light source unit.
  • An optical unit that vibrates in a substantially orthogonal direction for example, speckle noise reduction element 20R
  • a light modulation element for example, DMD500R
  • a projection unit that projects light project light (projection unit 150).
  • the optical unit includes a pair of lens arrays (an incident side microlens array 310 and an emission side microlens array 312).
  • speckle noise related to a projection display apparatus using a coherent light source can be reduced, and light loss due to an increase in light divergence angle can be reduced.
  • a lens array (incident side microlens array 310) arranged at least on the incident side of the pair of lens arrays has tan ⁇ ⁇
  • the lens diameter d and focal length f of each lens may be set so as to satisfy the condition of d / 4f.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an optical configuration of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a third configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the control unit 800 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the external interface 810 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the external interface 810 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the external interface 810 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification.
  • FIG. 12 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification.
  • FIG. 13 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the second modification.
  • FIG. 15 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the second modification.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the second modification.
  • FIG. 17 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the third modification.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification.
  • FIG. 12 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification.
  • FIG. 13
  • FIG. 18 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the third modification.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an optical configuration of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing a control unit 800 according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the spatial distribution of light intensity according to the related art.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the spatial distribution of light intensity according to the related art.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the spatial distribution of light intensity according to the related art.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the spatial distribution of the light intensity according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the spatial distribution of the light intensity according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 30 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a top view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the light source unit 110 according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a color separation / synthesis unit 140 and a projection unit 150 according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 34 is a detailed view of the speckle noise reduction element according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 35A is an optical path diagram of light passing through the speckle noise reduction element according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 35B is an optical path diagram of light that passes when the speckle noise reduction element according to the third embodiment moves upward from FIG. 35A due to vibration.
  • FIG. 35C is an optical path diagram of light that passes when the speckle noise reduction element according to the third embodiment moves below the position in FIG. 35A due to vibration.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating the color separation / synthesis unit 140 and the projection unit 150 according to the first modification.
  • FIG. 37 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the projection display apparatus includes a light source that emits coherent light, a light modulation element that modulates light emitted from the light source, and a projection surface that emits light emitted from the light modulation element.
  • the projection display apparatus is provided between the light source and the light modulation element, diffuses light emitted from the light source and transmits light emitted from the light source, and a first mode.
  • the control unit controls the diffusion optical element in the first mode so as to diffuse the light emitted from the light source with a higher diffusivity than in the second mode. That is, in the first mode, speckle noise is effectively removed because the degree of diffusion is higher than in the second mode.
  • the second mode since the diffusivity is lower than that in the first mode, a decrease in luminance is suppressed. That is, it is possible to appropriately achieve both speckle noise removal and luminance reduction suppression by switching modes.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 has a housing 200 and projects an image on the projection plane 300.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto the projection plane 300 provided on the wall surface.
  • the arrangement of the casing 200 in such a case is referred to as a wall surface projection arrangement.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 is disposed along a wall surface 420 and a floor surface 410 that is substantially perpendicular to the wall surface 420.
  • a horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “width direction”.
  • the normal direction of the projection plane 300 is referred to as “depth direction”.
  • a direction orthogonal to both the width direction and the depth direction is referred to as a “height direction”.
  • the housing 200 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the size of the housing 200 in the depth direction and the size of the housing 200 in the height direction are smaller than the size of the housing 200 in the width direction.
  • the size of the casing 200 in the depth direction is substantially equal to the projection distance from the reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 2) to the projection plane 300.
  • the size of the casing 200 is substantially equal to the size of the projection plane 300.
  • the size of the housing 200 is determined according to the position where the projection plane 300 is provided.
  • the housing 200 includes a projection surface side wall 210, a front surface side wall 220, a bottom plate 230, a top plate 240, a first side surface side wall 250, and a second side surface side wall 260. .
  • the projection surface side wall 210 is a plate-like member facing a first arrangement surface (in the first embodiment, a wall surface 420) substantially parallel to the projection surface 300.
  • the front side wall 220 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the projection plane side wall 210.
  • the bottom plate 230 is a plate-like member that faces the floor surface 410.
  • the top plate 240 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the bottom plate 230.
  • the first side wall 250 and the second side wall 260 are plate-like members that form both ends of the housing 200 in the width direction.
  • the housing 200 accommodates the light source unit 110, the power supply unit 120, the cooling unit 130, the color separation / combination unit 140, and the projection unit 150.
  • the projection surface side sidewall 210 has a projection surface side recess 160A and a projection surface side recess 160B.
  • the front side wall 220 has a front side convex portion 170.
  • the top plate 240 has a top plate recess 180.
  • the first side wall 250 has a cable terminal 190.
  • the light source unit 110 is a unit composed of a plurality of light sources (solid light sources 111W shown in FIG. 3). Each light source is a semiconductor laser element such as an LD (Laser Diode). In the first embodiment, the plurality of solid light sources 111W emit white light W having coherence. Details of the light source unit 110 will be described later.
  • the power supply unit 120 is a unit that supplies power to the projection display apparatus 100.
  • the power supply unit 120 supplies power to the light source unit 110 and the cooling unit 130.
  • the cooling unit 130 is a unit that cools a plurality of light sources provided in the light source unit 110. Specifically, the cooling unit 130 cools each light source by cooling a cooling jacket on which each light source is placed.
  • the cooling unit 130 is configured to cool the power supply unit 120 and the light modulation element (DMD 500 described later) in addition to each light source.
  • Color separation / combination unit 140 separates white light W and separates red component light R, green component light G, and blue component light B. Further, the color separation / combination unit 140 recombines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and emits image light to the projection unit 150. Details of the color separation / synthesis unit 140 will be described later (see FIG. 3).
  • the projection unit 150 projects the light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300.
  • the projection unit 150 includes a projection lens group (projection lens group 151 shown in FIG. 3) that projects the light emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300, and the projection lens group.
  • a reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 3) that reflects light toward the projection surface 300; Details of the projection unit 150 will be described later.
  • the projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B are provided on the projection surface side wall 210 and have a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> B extend to the end of the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> B are provided with vent holes that communicate with the inside of the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B extend along the width direction of the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> A is provided with an air inlet for allowing air outside the housing 200 to enter the housing 200 as a vent.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> B is provided with an exhaust port for venting air inside the housing 200 to the outside of the housing 200 as a vent.
  • the front side convex portion 170 is provided on the front side wall 220 and has a shape protruding to the outside of the housing 200.
  • the front side convex portion 170 is provided at the approximate center of the front side wall 220 in the width direction of the housing 200.
  • a reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 3) provided in the projection unit 150 is accommodated in a space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 inside the housing 200.
  • the top plate recess 180 is provided in the top plate 240 and has a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200.
  • the top plate recess 180 has an inclined surface 181 that goes down toward the projection plane 300 side.
  • the inclined surface 181 has a transmission region that transmits (projects) the light emitted from the projection unit 150 to the projection surface 300 side.
  • the cable terminal 190 is provided on the first side wall 250 and is a terminal such as a power terminal or a video terminal.
  • the cable terminal 190 may be provided on the second side wall 260.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the light source unit 110, the color separation / synthesis unit 140, and the projection unit 150 according to the first embodiment.
  • the first embodiment exemplifies a projection display apparatus 100 that supports a DLP (Digital Light Processing) method (registered trademark).
  • DLP Digital Light Processing
  • the light source unit 110 includes a plurality of solid light sources 111W, a plurality of optical fibers 113W, and a bundle portion 114W.
  • the solid-state light source 111W is a semiconductor laser element such as an LD that emits white light W having coherence.
  • An optical fiber 113W is connected to the solid light source 111W.
  • the optical fibers 113W connected to each solid light source 111W are bundled by a bundle portion 114W. That is, the light emitted from each solid light source 111W is transmitted by each optical fiber 113W and collected in the bundle portion 114W.
  • the solid light source 111W is placed on a cooling jacket (not shown) for cooling the solid light source 111W.
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a rod integrator 10W, a lens 21W, a lens 23, a mirror 34, and a mirror 35.
  • the color separation / combination unit 140 includes a diffusion optical element 600.
  • the rod integrator 10W has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface.
  • the rod integrator 10W makes the white light W emitted from the optical fiber 113W bundled by the bundle unit 114W uniform. That is, the rod integrator 10W makes the white light W uniform by reflecting the white light W on the light reflection side surface.
  • the rod integrator 10W may be a hollow rod having a light reflection side surface constituted by a mirror surface.
  • the rod integrator 10W may be a solid rod made of glass or the like.
  • the lens 21W is a lens that converts the white light W into a substantially parallel light so that the DMD 500 is irradiated with the white light W.
  • the lens 23 is a lens for substantially imaging the white light W on each DMD 500 while suppressing the expansion of the white light W.
  • the mirror 34 and the mirror 35 reflect the white light W.
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a lens 40, a prism 50, a prism 60, a prism 70, a prism 80, a prism 90, and a plurality of DMDs; Digital Micromirror Device (DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B).
  • DMD500R Digital Micromirror Device
  • DMD500G Digital Micromirror Device
  • DMD500B Digital Micromirror Device
  • the lens 40 is a lens that makes the white light W substantially parallel so that each color component light is irradiated to each DMD 500.
  • the prism 50 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 51 and a surface 52.
  • An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 51) and the prism 60 (surface 61), and the angle at which the white light W is incident on the surface 51 (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle.
  • the light W is reflected by the surface 51.
  • an air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), but the angle at which the white light W enters the surface 52 (incident angle) is smaller than the total reflection angle.
  • the white light W reflected by the surface 51 passes through the surface 52.
  • the prism 60 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 61.
  • the prism 70 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 71 and a surface 72.
  • An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), and the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are formed on the surface 71. Since the incident angle (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle, the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are reflected by the surface 71.
  • the surface 72 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the red component light R and the green component light G and reflects the blue component light B. Accordingly, among the light reflected by the surface 51, the red component light R and the green component light G are transmitted through the surface 72, and the blue component light B is reflected by the surface 72. The blue component light B reflected by the surface 71 is reflected by the surface 72.
  • the prism 80 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 81 and a surface 82. An air gap is provided between the prism 70 (surface 72) and the prism 80 (surface 81).
  • the angle (incident angle) at which the red component light R emitted from the DMD 500R and reflected by the surface 81 and then reflected by the surface 82 is incident on the surface 81 again is smaller than the total reflection angle, it is emitted from the DMD 500R. Then, the red component light R reflected by the surface 82 after being reflected by the surface 81 passes through the surface 81.
  • the surface 82 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the green component light G and reflects the red component light R. Accordingly, among the light transmitted through the surface 81, the green component light G is transmitted through the surface 82, and the red component light R is reflected by the surface 82. The red component light R reflected by the surface 81 is reflected by the surface 82. The green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G passes through the surface 82.
  • the prism 70 separates the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B by the surface 72.
  • the prism 80 separates the red component light R and the green component light G by the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color separation element that separates each color component light.
  • the cutoff wavelength of the surface 72 of the prism 70 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to green and a wavelength band corresponding to blue.
  • the cut-off wavelength of the surface 82 of the prism 80 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to red and a wavelength band corresponding to green.
  • the prism 70 combines the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B with the surface 72.
  • the prism 80 combines the red component light R and the green component light G with the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color composition element that synthesizes each color component light.
  • the prism 90 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 91.
  • the surface 91 is configured to transmit the green component light G.
  • the green component light G incident on the DMD 500G and the green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G pass through the surface 91.
  • DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B are configured by a plurality of micromirrors, and the plurality of micromirrors are movable. Each minute mirror basically corresponds to one pixel.
  • the DMD 500R switches whether to reflect the red component light R toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror.
  • the DMD 500G and the DMD 500B switch whether to reflect the green component light G and the blue component light B toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror.
  • the projection unit 150 includes a projection lens group 151 and a concave mirror 152.
  • the projection lens group 151 emits light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 to the concave mirror 152 side.
  • the concave mirror 152 reflects light (image light) emitted from the projection lens group 151.
  • the concave mirror 152 condenses the image light and then widens the image light.
  • the concave mirror 152 is an aspherical mirror having a concave surface on the projection lens group 151 side.
  • the image light collected by the concave mirror 152 passes through a transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 of the top plate recess 180 provided on the top plate 240.
  • the transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the position where the image light is collected by the concave mirror 152.
  • the concave mirror 152 is accommodated in the space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 as described above.
  • the concave mirror 152 is preferably fixed inside the front side convex portion 170.
  • the shape of the inner surface of the front side convex portion 170 is preferably a shape along the concave mirror 152.
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes the diffusion optical element 600 (speckle noise reduction element) as described above.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 is provided between the light source unit 110 and the DMD 500 on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110, and is a unit that reduces speckle noise of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. is there.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 is an optical element that reduces the spatial coherence of the white light W in order to reduce speckle.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 diffuses the white light W made uniform by the rod integrator 10W and transmits the white light W.
  • the configuration shown below can be considered as the configuration of the diffusing optical element 600.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 includes a driving device 610 and a diffusing plate 620.
  • the driving device 610 is connected to the diffusion plate 620 by an arm 611 and controls the diffusion plate 620 by driving the arm 611.
  • the diffusion plate 620 is disposed between the light source unit 110 and the DMD 500 on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusion plate 620 diffuses the light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusion plate 620 includes a plurality of regions (diffusion region 621, diffusion region 622, and diffusion region 623) having different diffusivities.
  • the diffusion degree of the diffusion region 621 is higher than that of the diffusion region 622
  • the diffusion degree of the diffusion region 622 is higher than that of the diffusion region 623.
  • the driving device 610 switches the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W among the diffusion regions 621 to 623 by driving the arm 611. Further, the driving device 610 vibrates the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10 ⁇ / b> W by driving the arm 611.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 includes a driving device 610 and a diffusion plate 620 as in the first configuration example.
  • the driving device 610 is connected to the rotating body 612 and drives the rotating body 612.
  • the driving device 610 switches the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W among the diffusion regions 621 to 623 by driving the rotating body 612.
  • the driving device 610 vibrates the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10 ⁇ / b> W by driving the arm 611.
  • a speckle reduction unit 600A is provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W, and a speckle reduction unit 600B is provided on the light emission side of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the configurations of the speckle reduction unit 600A and the speckle reduction unit 600B are the same as those of the diffusion optical element 600.
  • the diffusion plate 620A provided in the speckle reduction unit 600A is configured to be disposed on the optical path incident on the rod integrator 10W.
  • the diffusion plate 620B provided in the speckle reduction unit 600B is configured to be disposed on the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W.
  • the diffusion plate 620A and the diffusion plate 620B may be configured only by a region having a single diffusion degree. However, the diffusion degree of the diffusion plate 620A may be different from the diffusion degree of the diffusion plate 620B.
  • the driving device 610B provided in the speckle reduction unit 600B can drive the arm 611B so that the diffusion plate 620B is disposed in the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. Further, the driving device 610B can drive the arm 611B so as to remove the diffusion plate 620B from the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W.
  • the driving device 610A provided in the speckle reduction unit 600A may be able to drive the arm 611A so that the diffusion plate 620A is disposed in the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W.
  • the driving device 610A may be capable of driving the arm 611A so as to remove the diffusion plate 620A from the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the control unit 800 according to the first embodiment.
  • the control unit 800 is provided in the projection display apparatus 100 and controls the projection display apparatus 100.
  • the control unit 800 converts the video input signal into a video output signal.
  • the video input signal includes a red input signal R in , a green input signal G in, and a blue input signal B in .
  • the video output signal includes a red output signal Rout , a green output signal Gout, and a blue output signal Bout .
  • the video input signal and the video output signal are signals input for each of a plurality of pixels constituting one frame.
  • the control unit 800 controls a plurality of modes (at least the first mode and the second mode) having different diffusivities of light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the higher the diffusivity the higher the effect of removing speckle noise.
  • the effective light guided to the DMD 500 is decreased, so that the luminance of the image displayed on the projection plane 300 is decreased. That is, the effect of removing speckle noise and the luminance of the image displayed on the projection plane 300 have a trade-off relationship.
  • control unit 800 controls whether priority is given to removal of speckle noise or video brightness by controlling a plurality of modes having different diffusion degrees of light emitted from the light source unit 110. To do.
  • control unit 800 includes an external interface 810 and a mode control unit 820.
  • the external interface 810 is connected to the operation unit 910 and acquires an operation signal from the operation unit 910.
  • the operation unit 910 may be provided in the projection display apparatus 100 (housing 200), or may be provided in a remote controller.
  • the operation signal is a signal indicating a level giving priority to the luminance of the video.
  • the luminance of the video is given the highest priority. That is, when level 1 is selected, the mode is selected so that the diffusion degree of the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is the lowest.
  • level 3 when level 3 is selected, removal of speckle noise has the highest priority. That is, when level 3 is selected, the mode is selected so that the diffusion degree of the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is the highest.
  • the operation signal is a signal indicating the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer, for example, as shown in FIG.
  • the external interface 810 is connected to the imaging device 920A and the imaging device 920B, and acquires a captured image from the imaging device 920A and the imaging device 920B.
  • the imaging device 920 ⁇ / b> A and the imaging device 920 ⁇ / b> B are provided in the projection display apparatus 100 (housing 200), and are opposite to the projection plane 300 with respect to the projection display apparatus 100. Image the side. That is, the imaging device 920A and the imaging device 920B capture an image of the viewer.
  • the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer can be specified by the captured images acquired from the imaging device 920A and the imaging device 920B.
  • the mode control unit 820 controls a plurality of modes with different degrees of diffusion of light emitted from the light source unit 110. Specifically, first, the mode control unit 820 selects a mode from a plurality of modes based on information acquired by the external interface 810.
  • the mode control unit 820 selects any mode from a plurality of modes based on the level giving priority to luminance. To do.
  • the mode control unit 820 displays the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer. Any mode is selected from a plurality of modes based on the distance.
  • the mode control unit 820 specifies the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer, and the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer. Any mode is selected from a plurality of modes based on the distance between the two modes.
  • the mode control unit 820 controls the driving device 610 provided in the diffusing optical element 600 based on the selected mode.
  • the mode control unit 820 selects the diffusion region 621 to the diffusion region based on the selected mode.
  • the drive device 610 (arm 611) is controlled so as to switch the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W.
  • the drive device 610 (arm 611) is controlled so that the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W is irradiated onto the diffusion region 621 when the mode in which speckle noise removal is given the highest priority is selected.
  • the drive device 610 (arm 611) is controlled so that the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W is irradiated onto the diffusion region 623 when the mode in which the luminance of the video image has the highest priority is selected.
  • the mode control unit 820 performs diffusion regions 621 to diffusing based on the selected mode.
  • the drive device 610 (rotating body 612) is controlled so as to switch the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W in the region 623.
  • the mode control unit 820 transmits the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. Control the number of sheets. Specifically, when a mode in which speckle noise removal is prioritized is selected, the mode control unit 820 drives the drive device 610 (arm 611B) so as to remove the diffuser plate 620B from the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. To control. On the other hand, when the mode in which the luminance of the image is prioritized is selected, the mode control unit 820 causes the driving device 610 (arms) so that the diffusion plate 620B is disposed on the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. 611B).
  • the mode control unit 820 controls the driving device 610 (arm 611) so that the diffusion plate (diffusion region) disposed on the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W operates in a predetermined operation pattern. .
  • the control unit 800 has a higher diffusivity in the first mode (for example, a mode in which speckle noise removal is prioritized) than in the second mode (for example, a mode in which video luminance is prioritized).
  • the diffusion optical element 600 is controlled so as to diffuse the light emitted from the light source unit 110. That is, in the first mode, speckle noise is effectively removed because the degree of diffusion is higher than in the second mode.
  • the diffusivity is lower than that in the first mode, a decrease in luminance is suppressed. That is, it is possible to appropriately achieve both speckle noise removal and luminance reduction suppression by switching modes.
  • the configuration of the diffusing optical element 600 is different from that in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 and 12 are diagrams showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 includes a pair of rotating bodies (rotating body 651 and rotating body 652), and a belt-like diffusion wound around the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 in an endless loop shape.
  • the rotating body 651 can rotate around the rotation axis S1.
  • the rotating body 652 can rotate around a rotation axis S2 substantially parallel to the rotation axis S1.
  • a driving device (not shown) is connected to either the rotating shaft S1 or the rotating shaft S2.
  • the driving device is a motor, and the motor rotates the rotation shaft S1.
  • the rotating body 651 rotates, the rotational force of the rotating body 651 is transmitted to the rotating body 652 through the belt-shaped diffusion sheet 653.
  • the rotating body 652 also rotates. That is, both the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 can be rotated by driving one motor without using two motors.
  • Each of the rotator 651 and the rotator 652 has a columnar shape and has substantially the same shape. Between the rotator 651 and the rotator 652, an interval is provided which is approximately the same as the diameter of the light beam emitted from the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10 ⁇ / b> W.
  • the strip-shaped diffusion sheet 653 is formed of a light transmissive member.
  • the band-shaped diffusion sheet 653 is engraved with minute irregularities.
  • the strip-shaped diffusion sheet 653 diffuses the white light W emitted from the rod integrator 10 ⁇ / b> W and transmits the white light W.
  • the strip-shaped diffusion sheet 653 has a width approximately equal to the diameter of the light beam emitted from the rod integrator 10W.
  • the strip-shaped diffusion sheet 653 constitutes a diffusion surface F1 and a diffusion surface F2 that are spaced apart in the traveling direction of the white light W.
  • the size of each of the diffusing surface F1 and the diffusing surface F2 is approximately the same as the diameter of the light beam.
  • Each of the diffusing surface F1 and the diffusing surface F2 continuously moves as the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 rotate.
  • the moving direction of the diffusing surface F1 is opposite to the moving direction of the diffusing surface F2.
  • the diffusion surface F1 is a first diffusion surface that continuously moves in a predetermined direction.
  • the diffusion surface F2 is a second diffusion surface that continuously moves in a direction opposite to a predetermined direction (movement direction of the diffusion surface F1).
  • the white light W emitted from the rod integrator 10W first passes through the diffusion surface F1, and then passes through the diffusion surface F2.
  • the white light W passes through the diffusion surface F1
  • the white light W is diffused by the diffusion surface F1.
  • the white light W passes through the diffusion surface F2
  • the white light W is diffused by the diffusion surface F2.
  • the direction of the rotation axis S1 and the rotation axis S2 may be substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the rod integrator 10W. That is, the diffusing surface F1 and the diffusing surface F2 may be substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 may be arranged such that the orientations of the rotation axis S1 and the rotation axis S2 are in the height direction of the projection display apparatus 100.
  • the diffusion surface F ⁇ b> 1 and the diffusion surface F ⁇ b> 2 move along the height direction of the projection display apparatus 100.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 may be arranged so that the directions of the rotation axis S ⁇ b> 1 and the rotation axis S ⁇ b> 2 are the width direction of the projection display apparatus 100.
  • the diffusion surface F ⁇ b> 1 and the diffusion surface F ⁇ b> 2 move along the width direction of the projection display apparatus 100.
  • the white light W is diffused by the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2, and the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2 move continuously.
  • the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2 always move without the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2 being stationary. Therefore, the effect of reducing speckle noise can always be maintained.
  • the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2 are configured by the belt-like diffusion sheet 653 wound around the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 in an endless loop shape. Therefore, the size of the diffusing optical element 600 can be made approximately the same as the size of the light beam emitted from the rod integrator 10W. Therefore, the diffusing optical element 600 can be reduced in size, and the projection display apparatus 100 can be reduced in size.
  • the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 are rotated by one motor, so that power saving can be achieved.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 is provided on the light exit side of the rod integrator 10W. Therefore, compared with the case where the diffusion optical element 600 is provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W, a decrease in light utilization efficiency can be suppressed. Specifically, in the case where the diffusion optical element 600 is provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W, a part of the light beam diffused by the diffusion optical element 600 may not enter the rod integrator 10W.
  • a diffusion optical element 600 may be provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the size of the diffusing surface F1 and the diffusing surface F2 is smaller than the light incident surface of the rod integrator 10W by the strip-shaped diffusing sheet 653 wound around the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 in an endless loop shape. Is preferred.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 can be made smaller than the case where the diffusing optical element 600 is provided on the light exit side of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the configuration of the diffusing optical element 600 is different from that in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the second modification.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 includes a plurality of diffusing plates (a diffusing plate 661 and a diffusing plate 662).
  • the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 are disposed on the light exit side of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the diffusion plate 661 is a first diffusion plate that vibrates along a predetermined direction.
  • the diffusion plate 662 vibrates in a direction different from that of the diffusion plate 661. That is, the control unit 800 controls the diffusion optical element 600 so that the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 vibrate along different directions.
  • the diffusing plate 661 and the diffusing plate 662 are formed of a light-transmitting member and have minute unevenness.
  • the diffusing plate 661 and the diffusing plate 662 diffuse the white light W emitted from the rod integrator 10 ⁇ / b> W and transmit the white light W.
  • control unit 800 controls the diffusion optical element 600 so that when one of the diffusion plates 661 and 662 stops, the other diffusion plate moves.
  • the control unit 800 satisfies the relationship of ⁇ ′ ⁇ ⁇ + n ⁇ .
  • the diffusion optical element 600 is controlled.
  • the vertical and horizontal sizes of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be equal to or larger than the light output surface (the size of the light beam emitted from the light output surface) of the rod integrator 10W.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a case where the vertical and horizontal sizes of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 are approximately the same as the size of the lens 21W.
  • the vibration directions of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be the same.
  • the vibration directions of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be a direction (D1 direction) perpendicular to the optical axis w of the rod integrator 10W, as shown in FIG.
  • the vibration directions of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be the same direction (D2 direction) as the optical axis w of the rod integrator 10W, as shown in FIG.
  • the vibration directions of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be different.
  • the vibration direction of the diffusion plate 661 may be the D3 direction, and the vibration direction of the diffusion plate 662 may be the D1 direction.
  • the vibration direction of the diffusion plate 661 may be the D1 direction, and the vibration direction of the diffusion plate 662 may be the D2 direction.
  • the white light W is diffused by the diffusion plate 661 (diffusion surface F1) and the diffusion plate 662 (diffusion surface F2), and among the diffusion plate 661 (diffusion surface F1) and the diffusion plate 662 (diffusion surface F2), At least one of them always moves. Therefore, the effect of reducing speckle noise can always be maintained.
  • a diffusion plate 661 and a diffusion plate 662 may be disposed on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the diffusion plate 661 may be disposed on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10 ⁇ / b> W
  • the diffusion plate 662 may be disposed on the light emission side of the rod integrator 10 ⁇ / b> W.
  • the projection display apparatus has a relay optical system and a projection unit, and the aperture of the relay optical system and the aperture (exit pupil) of the projection unit have a conjugate relationship.
  • the spatial distribution of the light intensity is a Gaussian distribution reflecting the angular distribution of the light emitted from the laser light source.
  • the projection plane starts from the peripheral area of the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit.
  • the intensity of light reaching one point is smaller than the intensity of light reaching one point on the projection plane from the central area of the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit.
  • a projection display apparatus includes a light source that emits coherent light, a light modulation element that modulates light emitted from the light source, and a projection surface that emits light emitted from the light modulation element. And a relay optical system that relays the light emitted from the light source so that the light emitted from the light source is irradiated onto the light modulation element.
  • the projection display apparatus includes a uniformizing optical element that uniformizes the spatial distribution of light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit.
  • the uniformizing optical element uniformizes the spatial distribution of light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit. Accordingly, since the intensity of light from the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit to one point on the projection plane has a uniform angular distribution, the speckle noise reduction effect due to angle superposition is sufficiently exerted, and speckle noise is reduced. It can be effectively removed.
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing a projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 has a casing 200 and projects an image on the projection plane 300.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto the projection plane 300 provided on the wall surface.
  • the arrangement of the casing 200 in such a case is referred to as a wall surface projection arrangement.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 is disposed along a wall surface 420 and a floor surface 410 that is substantially perpendicular to the wall surface 420.
  • a horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “width direction”.
  • the normal direction of the projection plane 300 is referred to as “depth direction”.
  • a direction orthogonal to both the width direction and the depth direction is referred to as a “height direction”.
  • the housing 200 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the size of the housing 200 in the depth direction and the size of the housing 200 in the height direction are smaller than the size of the housing 200 in the width direction.
  • the size of the casing 200 in the depth direction is substantially equal to the projection distance from the reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 20) to the projection plane 300.
  • the size of the casing 200 is substantially equal to the size of the projection plane 300.
  • the size of the housing 200 is determined according to the position where the projection plane 300 is provided.
  • the housing 200 includes a projection surface side wall 210, a front surface side wall 220, a bottom plate 230, a top plate 240, a first side surface side wall 250, and a second side surface side wall 260. .
  • the projection surface side wall 210 is a plate-like member that faces a first arrangement surface (in the second embodiment, a wall surface 420) substantially parallel to the projection surface 300.
  • the front side wall 220 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the projection plane side wall 210.
  • the bottom plate 230 is a plate-like member that faces the floor surface 410.
  • the top plate 240 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the bottom plate 230.
  • the first side wall 250 and the second side wall 260 are plate-like members that form both ends of the housing 200 in the width direction.
  • the housing 200 accommodates the light source unit 110, the power supply unit 120, the cooling unit 130, the color separation / combination unit 140, and the projection unit 150.
  • the projection surface side sidewall 210 has a projection surface side recess 160A and a projection surface side recess 160B.
  • the front side wall 220 has a front side convex portion 170.
  • the top plate 240 has a top plate recess 180.
  • the first side wall 250 has a cable terminal 190.
  • the light source unit 110 is a unit composed of a plurality of light sources (solid light source 111W shown in FIG. 21). Each light source is a semiconductor laser element such as an LD (Laser Diode). In the second embodiment, the plurality of solid light sources 111W emit white light W having coherence. Details of the light source unit 110 will be described later.
  • the power supply unit 120 is a unit that supplies power to the projection display apparatus 100.
  • the power supply unit 120 supplies power to the light source unit 110 and the cooling unit 130.
  • the cooling unit 130 is a unit that cools a plurality of light sources provided in the light source unit 110. Specifically, the cooling unit 130 cools each light source by cooling a cooling jacket on which each light source is placed.
  • the cooling unit 130 is configured to cool the power supply unit 120 and the light modulation element (DMD 500 described later) in addition to each light source.
  • Color separation / combination unit 140 separates white light W and separates red component light R, green component light G, and blue component light B. Further, the color separation / combination unit 140 recombines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and emits image light to the projection unit 150. Details of the color separation / synthesis unit 140 will be described later (see FIG. 21).
  • the projection unit 150 projects the light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300. Specifically, the projection unit 150 projects the light emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300 (projection lens group 151 shown in FIG. 21) and the projection lens group. A reflecting mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 21) that reflects light toward the projection plane 300; Details of the projection unit 150 will be described later.
  • the projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B are provided on the projection surface side wall 210 and have a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> B extend to the end of the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> B are provided with vent holes that communicate with the inside of the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B extend along the width direction of the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> A is provided with an air inlet for allowing air outside the housing 200 to enter the housing 200 as a vent.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> B is provided with an exhaust port for venting air inside the housing 200 to the outside of the housing 200 as a vent.
  • the front side convex portion 170 is provided on the front side wall 220 and has a shape protruding to the outside of the housing 200.
  • the front side convex portion 170 is provided at the approximate center of the front side wall 220 in the width direction of the housing 200.
  • a reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 21) provided in the projection unit 150 is accommodated in a space formed by the front side convex portion 170 inside the housing 200.
  • the top plate recess 180 is provided in the top plate 240 and has a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200.
  • the top plate recess 180 has an inclined surface 181 that goes down toward the projection plane 300 side.
  • the inclined surface 181 has a transmission region that transmits (projects) the light emitted from the projection unit 150 to the projection surface 300 side.
  • the cable terminal 190 is provided on the first side wall 250 and is a terminal such as a power terminal or a video terminal.
  • the cable terminal 190 may be provided on the second side wall 260.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the light source unit 110, the color separation / synthesis unit 140, and the projection unit 150 according to the second embodiment.
  • the second embodiment exemplifies a projection display apparatus 100 that supports a DLP (Digital Light Processing) method (registered trademark).
  • DLP Digital Light Processing
  • the light source unit 110 includes a plurality of solid light sources 111W, a plurality of optical fibers 113W, and a bundle portion 114W.
  • the solid-state light source 111W is a semiconductor laser element such as an LD that emits white light W having coherence.
  • An optical fiber 113W is connected to the solid light source 111W.
  • the optical fibers 113W connected to each solid light source 111W are bundled by a bundle portion 114W. That is, the light emitted from each solid light source 111W is transmitted by each optical fiber 113W and collected in the bundle portion 114W.
  • the solid light source 111W is placed on a cooling jacket (not shown) for cooling the solid light source 111W.
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a rod integrator 10W, a lens 21W, a lens 23, a mirror 34, and a mirror 35.
  • the color separation / combination unit 140 includes a diffusion optical element 600.
  • the rod integrator 10W has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface.
  • the rod integrator 10W makes the white light W emitted from the optical fiber 113W bundled by the bundle unit 114W uniform. That is, the rod integrator 10W makes the white light W uniform by reflecting the white light W on the light reflection side surface.
  • the rod integrator 10W may be a hollow rod having a light reflection side surface constituted by a mirror surface.
  • the rod integrator 10W may be a solid rod made of glass or the like.
  • the lens 21W is a lens that converts the white light W into a substantially parallel light so that the DMD 500 is irradiated with the white light W.
  • the lens 23 is a lens for substantially imaging the white light W on each DMD 500 while suppressing the expansion of the white light W.
  • the mirror 34 and the mirror 35 reflect the white light W.
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a lens 40, a prism 50, a prism 60, a prism 70, a prism 80, a prism 90, and a plurality of DMDs; Digital Micromirror Device (DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B).
  • DMD500R Digital Micromirror Device
  • DMD500G Digital Micromirror Device
  • DMD500B Digital Micromirror Device
  • the lens 40 is a lens that makes the white light W substantially parallel so that each color component light is irradiated to each DMD 500.
  • the prism 50 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 51 and a surface 52.
  • An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 51) and the prism 60 (surface 61), and the angle at which the white light W is incident on the surface 51 (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle.
  • the light W is reflected by the surface 51.
  • an air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), but the angle at which the white light W enters the surface 52 (incident angle) is smaller than the total reflection angle.
  • the white light W reflected by the surface 51 passes through the surface 52.
  • the prism 60 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 61.
  • the prism 70 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 71 and a surface 72.
  • An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), and the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are formed on the surface 71. Since the incident angle (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle, the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are reflected by the surface 71.
  • the surface 72 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the red component light R and the green component light G and reflects the blue component light B. Accordingly, among the light reflected by the surface 51, the red component light R and the green component light G are transmitted through the surface 72, and the blue component light B is reflected by the surface 72. The blue component light B reflected by the surface 71 is reflected by the surface 72.
  • the prism 80 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 81 and a surface 82. An air gap is provided between the prism 70 (surface 72) and the prism 80 (surface 81).
  • the angle (incident angle) at which the red component light R emitted from the DMD 500R and reflected by the surface 81 and then reflected by the surface 82 is incident on the surface 81 again is smaller than the total reflection angle, it is emitted from the DMD 500R. Then, the red component light R reflected by the surface 82 after being reflected by the surface 81 passes through the surface 81.
  • the surface 82 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the green component light G and reflects the red component light R. Accordingly, among the light transmitted through the surface 81, the green component light G is transmitted through the surface 82, and the red component light R is reflected by the surface 82. The red component light R reflected by the surface 81 is reflected by the surface 82. The green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G passes through the surface 82.
  • the prism 70 separates the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B by the surface 72.
  • the prism 80 separates the red component light R and the green component light G by the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color separation element that separates each color component light.
  • the cutoff wavelength of the surface 72 of the prism 70 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to green and a wavelength band corresponding to blue.
  • the cut-off wavelength of the surface 82 of the prism 80 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to red and a wavelength band corresponding to green.
  • the prism 70 combines the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B with the surface 72.
  • the prism 80 combines the red component light R and the green component light G with the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color composition element that synthesizes each color component light.
  • the prism 90 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 91.
  • the surface 91 is configured to transmit the green component light G.
  • the green component light G incident on the DMD 500G and the green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G pass through the surface 91.
  • DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B are configured by a plurality of micromirrors, and the plurality of micromirrors are movable. Each minute mirror basically corresponds to one pixel.
  • the DMD 500R switches whether to reflect the red component light R toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror.
  • the DMD 500G and the DMD 500B switch whether to reflect the green component light G and the blue component light B toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror.
  • the projection unit 150 includes a projection lens group 151 and a concave mirror 152.
  • the projection lens group 151 emits light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 to the concave mirror 152 side.
  • the concave mirror 152 reflects light (image light) emitted from the projection lens group 151.
  • the concave mirror 152 condenses the image light and then widens the image light.
  • the concave mirror 152 is an aspherical mirror having a concave surface on the projection lens group 151 side.
  • the image light collected by the concave mirror 152 passes through a transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 of the top plate recess 180 provided on the top plate 240.
  • the transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the position where the image light is collected by the concave mirror 152.
  • the concave mirror 152 is accommodated in the space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 as described above.
  • the concave mirror 152 is preferably fixed inside the front side convex portion 170.
  • the shape of the inner surface of the front side convex portion 170 is preferably a shape along the concave mirror 152.
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes the diffusion optical element 600 (speckle noise reduction element) as described above.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 is provided between the light source unit 110 and the DMD 500 on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110, and is a unit that reduces speckle noise of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. is there.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 is an optical element that reduces the spatial coherence of the white light W in order to reduce speckle.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 diffuses the white light W made uniform by the rod integrator 10W and transmits the white light W.
  • the configuration shown below can be considered as the configuration of the diffusing optical element 600.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 includes a glass plate 710, a diffusion surface 711, and a diffusion surface 712.
  • the glass plate 710 is disposed between the light source unit 110 and the DMD 500 on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the glass plate 710 is disposed on the light emitting side of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the glass plate 710 has two main surfaces, and the two main surfaces are surfaces substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusion surface 711 is provided on one main surface of the two main surfaces of the glass plate 710. Specifically, the diffusing surface 711 is provided on the main surface provided on the light source unit 110 side. Further, the diffusion surface 711 is provided in a central region including the optical axis center of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. The diffusion surface 711 diffuses the light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusion surface 712 is provided on the other main surface of the two main surfaces of the glass plate 710. Specifically, the diffusion surface 712 is provided on the main surface provided on the opposite side of the light source unit 110. Further, the diffusing surface 712 is provided in a peripheral region provided around the central region including the optical axis center of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. The diffusion surface 712 diffuses the light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is diffused by both the diffusion surface 711 and the diffusion surface 712.
  • the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is diffused only by the diffusion surface 712.
  • the diffusivity in the central region is larger than that in the peripheral region.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 includes a glass plate 720, a diffusion surface 721, a glass plate 730, and a diffusion surface 731.
  • the glass plate 720 has two main surfaces, and the two main surfaces are surfaces substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the glass plate 730 has two main surfaces, and the two main surfaces are surfaces substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusion surface 721 is provided on one main surface of the two main surfaces of the glass plate 720.
  • the diffusing surface 721 is provided on the main surface provided on the light source unit 110 side. Further, the diffusing surface 721 is provided in a central region including the optical axis center of the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusion surface 721 diffuses the light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusing surface 721 may be provided on the main surface provided on the opposite side of the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusion surface 731 is provided on one main surface of the two main surfaces of the glass plate 730.
  • the diffusing surface 731 is provided on the main surface provided on the light source unit 110 side.
  • the diffusing surface 731 is provided in a peripheral region provided around the central region including the optical axis center of the light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusion surface 731 diffuses light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits light emitted from the light source unit 110.
  • the diffusing surface 731 may be provided on a main surface provided on the opposite side of the light source unit 110.
  • the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is diffused by both the diffusion surface 721 and the diffusion surface 731.
  • the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is diffused only by the diffusion surface 731.
  • the diffusivity in the central region is larger than that in the peripheral region.
  • FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing a control unit 800 according to the second embodiment.
  • the control unit 800 is provided in the projection display apparatus 100 and controls the projection display apparatus 100.
  • the control unit 800 converts the video input signal into a video output signal.
  • the video input signal includes a red input signal R in , a green input signal G in, and a blue input signal B in .
  • the video output signal includes a red output signal Rout , a green output signal Gout, and a blue output signal Bout .
  • the video input signal and the video output signal are signals input for each of a plurality of pixels constituting one frame.
  • the control unit 800 includes an element control unit 810.
  • the element control unit 810 controls the diffusion optical element 600 so as to operate in a predetermined operation pattern.
  • the element control unit 810 causes the diffusion optical element 600 to vibrate in a predetermined operation pattern under the control of a driving device that drives the diffusion optical element 600.
  • the element control unit 810 can independently control the glass plate 720 (diffusing surface 721) and the glass plate 730 (diffusing surface 731). it can.
  • the control unit 800 allows the diffusion optical element to satisfy the relationship of ⁇ ′ ⁇ ⁇ + n ⁇ . 600 may be controlled.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 makes the spatial distribution of the light intensity uniform on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit. Accordingly, since the intensity of light from the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit to one point on the projection plane has a uniform angular distribution, the speckle noise reduction effect due to angle superposition is sufficiently exerted, and speckle noise is reduced. It can be effectively removed.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 has a configuration in which the diffusivity of the central region is larger than the diffusivity of the peripheral region. That is, the light passing through the central region of the diffusing optical element 600 is diffused more than the light passing through the peripheral region of the diffusing optical element 600. Accordingly, the spatial distribution of light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit is made uniform.
  • 25 and 26 are diagrams for explaining the spatial distribution of light intensity according to the related art.
  • FIG. 25 the optical structure provided in a projection type video display apparatus is shown typically. Specifically, in FIG. 25, the optical path of light emitted from the light source (rod integrator) is schematically illustrated in a straight line.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a rod integrator, a relay optical system, a light modulation element, and a projection unit as an optical configuration provided in the projection display apparatus.
  • the angular distribution of the light emitted from the light source is a Gaussian distribution centered at 0 °. Further, the aperture of the relay optical system and the aperture (exit pupil) of the projection unit have a conjugate relationship.
  • the spatial distribution of the light intensity on the diaphragm surface of the relay optical system and the diaphragm surface (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit is the light emitted from the light source. It becomes a Gaussian distribution reflecting the angle distribution.
  • the light flux from the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit to one point on the projection plane (center point of the projection plane), as shown in FIG. 26, the light flux from the peripheral region to one point on the projection plane. Is smaller than the light flux from the central region to one point on the projection surface. That is, the intensity of light reaching one point on the projection surface does not have a uniform angular distribution.
  • FIG. 27 an optical configuration provided in the projection display apparatus is schematically shown. Specifically, in FIG. 27, the optical path of light emitted from the light source (rod integrator) is schematically illustrated in a straight line.
  • a rod integrator for example, rod integrator 10W
  • a relay optical system for example, lens 23, lens 40
  • a light modulation element for example, DMD 500.
  • a projection unit for example, a projection lens group 151 is illustrated.
  • the angular distribution of light emitted from the light source is a Gaussian distribution centered on 0 °.
  • the aperture of the relay optical system and the aperture (exit pupil) of the projection unit have a conjugate relationship.
  • the spatial distribution of the light intensity on the diaphragm surface of the relay optical system and the diaphragm surface (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit is made uniform by the diffusion optical element 600. Is done.
  • the intensity of light reaching one point on the projection plane has a uniform angular distribution as shown in FIG.
  • the light passing through the central region of the diffusing optical element 600 is diffused more than the light passing through the peripheral region of the diffusing optical element 600. Therefore, the light on the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit
  • the spatial distribution of intensity is made uniform.
  • the intensity of light reaching one point on the projection surface has a uniform angular distribution, the effect of reducing speckle noise by the angle superposition is sufficiently exhibited, and speckle noise is efficiently removed.
  • the projection display apparatus reduces speckle noise by oscillating, swinging, or rotating a light source unit configured by a coherent light source and substantially orthogonal to the optical axis of the light source unit.
  • a projection-type image display device comprising: a speckle noise reducing element to be controlled; a light modulation element that modulates light emitted from the coherent light source; and a projection unit that projects light modulated by the light modulation element.
  • the speckle noise reduction element has a first lens array having a focal length f and a second lens array having a focal length f ′, and the interval between the media sandwiched between the lens arrays makes the absolute refractive index n. Is approximately (f + f ′) / n.
  • the speckle noise reduction element has a first lens array having a focal length f and a second lens array having a focal length f ′, and the distance between the media sandwiched between the lens arrays is an absolute refractive index n. Is approximately (f + f ′) / n.
  • the position and phase of each light beam emitted from the speckle noise reduction element changes with time by vibrating, swinging, or rotating the speckle noise reduction element arranged in the illumination optical system.
  • speckle noise can be reduced, and light loss due to an increase in light divergence angle can be reduced.
  • FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 30 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 has a casing 200 and projects an image on the projection plane 300.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 is arranged along a first arrangement surface (wall surface 420 shown in FIG. 30) and a second arrangement surface (floor surface 410 shown in FIG. 30) substantially perpendicular to the first arrangement surface.
  • the third embodiment exemplifies a case in which the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto the projection plane 300 provided on the wall surface (wall surface projection).
  • the arrangement of the casing 200 in such a case is referred to as a wall surface projection arrangement.
  • the first arrangement surface that is substantially parallel to the projection plane 300 is the wall surface 420.
  • a horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “width direction”.
  • the normal direction of the projection plane 300 is referred to as “depth direction”.
  • a direction orthogonal to both the width direction and the depth direction is referred to as a “height direction”.
  • the housing 200 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the size of the housing 200 in the depth direction and the size of the housing 200 in the height direction are smaller than the size of the housing 200 in the width direction.
  • the size of the casing 200 in the depth direction is substantially equal to the projection distance from the reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 30) to the projection plane 300.
  • the size of the casing 200 is substantially equal to the size of the projection plane 300.
  • the size of the housing 200 is determined according to the position where the projection plane 300 is provided.
  • the housing 200 includes a projection surface side wall 210, a front surface side wall 220, a bottom plate 230, a top plate 240, a first side surface side wall 250, and a second side surface side wall 260. .
  • the projection surface side wall 210 is a plate-like member facing a first arrangement surface (in the third embodiment, a wall surface 420) substantially parallel to the projection surface 300.
  • the front side wall 220 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the projection plane side wall 210.
  • the bottom plate 230 is a plate-like member that faces a second arrangement surface (in the third embodiment, the floor surface 410) that is substantially perpendicular to the first arrangement surface that is substantially parallel to the projection plane 300.
  • the top plate 240 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the bottom plate 230.
  • the first side wall 250 and the second side wall 260 are plate-like members that form both ends of the housing 200 in the width direction.
  • the housing 200 accommodates the light source unit 110, the power supply unit 120, the cooling unit 130, the color separation / combination unit 140, and the projection unit 150.
  • the projection surface side sidewall 210 has a projection surface side recess 160A and a projection surface side recess 160B.
  • the front side wall 220 has a front side convex portion 170.
  • the top plate 240 has a top plate recess 180.
  • the first side wall 250 has a cable terminal 190.
  • the light source unit 110 is a unit composed of a plurality of coherent light sources (coherent light source 111 shown in FIG. 32). Each coherent light source is a light source such as an LD (Laser Diode).
  • the light source unit 110 includes a red coherent light source that emits red component light R (red coherent light source 111R shown in FIG. 32) and a green coherent light source that emits green component light G (green coherent light source shown in FIG. 32).
  • the power supply unit 120 is a unit that supplies power to the projection display apparatus 100.
  • the power supply unit 120 supplies power to the light source unit 110 and the cooling unit 130.
  • the cooling unit 130 is a unit that cools a plurality of coherent light sources provided in the light source unit 110. Specifically, the cooling unit 130 cools each coherent light source by cooling a cooling jacket (cooling jacket 131 shown in FIG. 32) on which each coherent light source is placed.
  • the cooling unit 130 is configured to cool the power supply unit 120 and the light modulation element (DMD 500 described later) in addition to each coherent light source.
  • the color separation / combination unit 140 combines the red component light R emitted from the red coherent light source, the green component light G emitted from the green coherent light source, and the blue component light B emitted from the blue coherent light source.
  • the color separation / combination unit 140 separates the combined light including the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and modulates the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B. Further, the color separation / combination unit 140 recombines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and emits image light to the projection unit 150. Details of the color separation / synthesis unit 140 will be described later (see FIG. 33).
  • the projection unit 150 projects the light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300. Specifically, the projection unit 150 projects the light emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300 (projection lens group 151 shown in FIG. 33) and the projection lens group. A reflecting mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 33) that reflects light toward the projection plane 300; Details of the projection unit 150 will be described later.
  • the projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B are provided on the projection surface side wall 210 and have a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> B extend to the end of the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> B are provided with vent holes that communicate with the inside of the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B extend along the width direction of the housing 200.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> A is provided with an air inlet for allowing air outside the housing 200 to enter the housing 200 as a vent.
  • the projection surface side recess 160 ⁇ / b> B is provided with an exhaust port for venting air inside the housing 200 to the outside of the housing 200 as a vent.
  • the front side convex portion 170 is provided on the front side wall 220 and has a shape protruding to the outside of the housing 200.
  • the front side convex portion 170 is provided at the approximate center of the front side wall 220 in the width direction of the housing 200.
  • a reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 33) provided in the projection unit 150 is accommodated in a space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 inside the housing 200.
  • the top plate recess 180 is provided in the top plate 240 and has a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200.
  • the top plate recess 180 has an inclined surface 181 that goes down toward the projection plane 300 side.
  • the inclined surface 181 has a transmission region that transmits (projects) the light emitted from the projection unit 150 to the projection surface 300 side.
  • the cable terminal 190 is provided on the first side wall 250 and is a terminal such as a power terminal or a video terminal.
  • the cable terminal 190 may be provided on the second side wall 260.
  • FIG. 31 is a top view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment.
  • the projection unit 150 is arranged in the approximate center of the casing 200 in the horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 (the width direction of the casing 200).
  • the light source unit 110 and the cooling unit 130 are arranged side by side with the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the housing 200. Specifically, the light source unit 110 is arranged side by side on the one side (second side wall 260 side) of the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the casing 200.
  • the cooling unit 130 is arranged side by side on the other side (first side wall 250 side) of the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the casing 200.
  • the power supply unit 120 is arranged side by side with the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the casing 200. Specifically, the power supply unit 120 is arranged side by side on the light source unit 110 side with respect to the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the casing 200. The power supply unit 120 is preferably disposed between the projection unit 150 and the light source unit 110.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the light source unit 110 according to the third embodiment.
  • the light source unit 110 includes a plurality of red coherent light sources 111R, a plurality of green coherent light sources 111G, and a plurality of blue coherent light sources 111B.
  • the red coherent light source 111R is a red coherent light source such as an LD that emits the red component light R as described above.
  • the red coherent light source 111R has a head 112R, and an optical fiber 113R is connected to the head 112R.
  • the optical fibers 113R connected to the heads 112R of each red coherent light source 111R are bundled by a bundle portion 114R. That is, the light emitted from each red coherent light source 111R is transmitted by each optical fiber 113R and collected in the bundle portion 114R.
  • the red coherent light source 111R is placed on the cooling jacket 131R.
  • the red coherent light source 111R is fixed to the cooling jacket 131R by screwing or the like. Therefore, the red coherent light source 111R is cooled by the cooling jacket 131R.
  • the green coherent light source 111G is a green coherent light source such as an LD that emits the green component light G as described above.
  • the green coherent light source 111G has a head 112G, and an optical fiber 113G is connected to the head 112G.
  • the optical fiber 113G connected to the head 112G of each green coherent light source 111G is bundled by the bundle unit 114G. That is, the light emitted from each green coherent light source 111G is transmitted by each optical fiber 113G and collected in the bundle unit 114G.
  • the green coherent light source 111G is placed on the cooling jacket 131G.
  • the green coherent light source 111G is fixed to the cooling jacket 131G by screwing or the like. Therefore, the green coherent light source 111G is cooled by the cooling jacket 131G.
  • the coherent light source 111B is a blue coherent light source such as an LD that emits the blue component light B as described above.
  • the blue coherent light source 111B has a head 112B, and an optical fiber 113B is connected to the head 112B.
  • the optical fibers 113B connected to the head 112B of each blue coherent light source 111B are bundled by a bundle unit 114B. That is, the light emitted from each blue coherent light source 111B is transmitted by each optical fiber 113B and collected in the bundle portion 114B.
  • the blue coherent light source 111B is placed on the cooling jacket 131B.
  • the blue coherent light source 111B is fixed to the cooling jacket 131B by screwing or the like. Therefore, the blue coherent light source 111B is cooled by the cooling jacket 131B.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a color separation / synthesis unit 140 and a projection unit 150 according to the third embodiment.
  • the third embodiment exemplifies a projection display apparatus 100 that supports a DLP (Digital Light Processing) method (registered trademark).
  • DLP Digital Light Processing
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a first unit 141 and a second unit 142.
  • the first unit 141 combines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and outputs the combined light including the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B to the second unit 142. To do.
  • the first unit 141 includes a plurality of rod integrators (rod integrator 10R, rod integrator 10G and rod integrator 10B), a lens group (lens 21R, lens 21G, lens 21B, lens 22, lens 23), And a mirror group (mirror 31, mirror 32, mirror 33, mirror 34, and mirror 35).
  • rod integrator 10R rod integrator 10G and rod integrator 10B
  • lens group lens group
  • mirror group mirror 31, mirror 32, mirror 33, mirror 34, and mirror 35.
  • the rod integrator 10R has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface.
  • the rod integrator 10R makes the red component light R emitted from the optical fiber 113R bundled by the bundle portion 114R uniform. In other words, the rod integrator 10R makes the red component light R uniform by reflecting the red component light R on the light reflection side surface.
  • the rod integrator 10G has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface.
  • the rod integrator 10G makes the green component light G emitted from the optical fiber 113G bundled by the bundle portion 114G uniform. That is, the rod integrator 10G makes the green component light G uniform by reflecting the green component light G on the light reflection side surface.
  • the rod integrator 10B has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface.
  • the rod integrator 10B makes the blue component light B emitted from the optical fiber 113B bundled by the bundle portion 114B uniform. That is, the rod integrator 10B makes the blue component light B uniform by reflecting the blue component light B on the light reflection side surface.
  • rod integrator 10R, the rod integrator 10G, and the rod integrator 10B may be hollow rods whose light-reflecting side surfaces are mirror surfaces. Further, the rod integrator 10R, the rod integrator 10G, and the rod integrator 10B may be solid rods made of glass or the like.
  • the speckle noise reduction element 20R is disposed immediately after the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10R that is substantially conjugate to the light modulation element and the screen surface, and is perpendicular to the optical axis of the red component light R from the rod integrator 10R. Periodically oscillates, swings, or rotates in the direction of.
  • vibration means reciprocating with respect to a specific axis around the optical axis of light, or reciprocating in parallel with the optical axis of light
  • oscillation means that the optical axis of light is reciprocated.
  • it indicates that the surface moves in a substantially circular plane, and the rotation indicates that the rotation is performed around a specific axis parallel to the optical axis of light.
  • the speckle noise reduction element 20R periodically vibrates, swings, or rotates, so that the red component light R emitted from the rod integrator 20R passes through the speckle noise reduction element 20R and is emitted.
  • the position and phase can be changed according to time.
  • the speckle noise reduction element 20G is disposed immediately after the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10G that is a substantially conjugate surface of the light modulation element and the screen surface, and is perpendicular to the optical axis of the green component light G from the rod integrator 10G. Periodically oscillates, swings, or rotates in the direction of. The speckle noise reduction element 20G periodically vibrates, swings, or rotates so that the red component light G emitted from the rod integrator 20G passes through the speckle noise reduction element 20G and is emitted. The position and phase can be changed according to time.
  • the speckle noise reduction element 20B is disposed immediately after the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10B, which is a substantially conjugate surface of the light modulation element and the screen surface, and is perpendicular to the optical axis of the blue component light B from the rod integrator 10B. Are periodically vibrated, oscillated, or rotated in the direction of.
  • the speckle noise reducing element 20B periodically vibrates, swings, or rotates so that the green component light B emitted from the rod integrator 20B is emitted from the speckle noise reducing element 20B.
  • the emission position and phase of each light beam can be changed according to time.
  • Speckle noise is observed as an irregular granular intensity distribution when coherent light such as laser light is scattered at each point on a rough surface such as a screen and interferes with an irregular phase relationship caused by the surface roughness. It is a phenomenon.
  • the position and phase of each light beam emitted from the speckle noise reduction element changes with time.
  • the speckle pattern is superimposed on time, and the speckle noise that is visually recognized is reduced.
  • the lens 21R is a relay lens that relays the red component light R so that the red component light R is irradiated onto the DMD 500R.
  • the lens 21G is a relay lens that relays the green component light G so that the DMD 500G is irradiated with the green component light G.
  • the lens 21B is a relay lens that relays the blue component light B so that the blue component light B is irradiated onto the DMD 500B.
  • the lens 22 is a relay lens for substantially imaging the red component light R and the green component light G on the DMD 500R and DMD 500G while suppressing the expansion of the red component light R and the green component light G.
  • the lens 23 is a relay lens for substantially imaging the blue component light B on the DMD 500B while suppressing the expansion of the blue component light B.
  • the mirror 31 reflects the red component light R emitted from the rod integrator 10R.
  • the mirror 32 is a dichroic mirror that reflects the green component light G emitted from the rod integrator 10G and transmits the red component light R.
  • the mirror 33 is a dichroic mirror that transmits the blue component light B emitted from the rod integrator 10B and reflects the red component light R and the green component light G.
  • Mirror 34 reflects red component light R, green component light G, and blue component light B.
  • the mirror 35 reflects the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B to the second unit 142 side.
  • each component is shown in a plan view for the sake of simplicity. However, the mirror 35 obliquely reflects the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B in the height direction. Reflect on.
  • the second unit 142 separates the combined light including the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and modulates the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B. Subsequently, the second unit 142 recombines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and emits image light to the projection unit 150 side.
  • the second unit 142 includes a lens 40, a prism 50, a prism 60, a prism 70, a prism 80, a prism 90, and a plurality of DMDs; Digital Micromirror Device (DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B).
  • DMD500R Digital Micromirror Device
  • DMD500G Digital Micromirror Device
  • DMD500B Digital Micromirror Device
  • the lens 40 is a relay lens that relays the light emitted from the first unit 141 so that each color component light is irradiated to each DMD.
  • the prism 50 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 51 and a surface 52.
  • An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 51) and the prism 60 (surface 61), and the angle (incident angle) at which the light emitted from the first unit 141 enters the surface 51 is the total reflection angle. Therefore, the light emitted from the first unit 141 is reflected by the surface 51.
  • an air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), but the angle at which the light emitted from the first unit 141 enters the surface 52 (incident angle) is all. Since it is smaller than the reflection angle, the light reflected by the surface 51 passes through the surface 52.
  • the prism 60 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 61.
  • the prism 70 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 71 and a surface 72.
  • An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), and the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are formed on the surface 71. Since the incident angle (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle, the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are reflected by the surface 71.
  • the surface 72 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the red component light R and the green component light G and reflects the blue component light B. Accordingly, among the light reflected by the surface 51, the red component light R and the green component light G are transmitted through the surface 72, and the blue component light B is reflected by the surface 72. The blue component light B reflected by the surface 71 is reflected by the surface 72.
  • the prism 80 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 81 and a surface 82. An air gap is provided between the prism 70 (surface 72) and the prism 80 (surface 81).
  • the angle (incident angle) at which the red component light R emitted from the DMD 500R and reflected by the surface 81 and then reflected by the surface 82 is incident on the surface 81 again is smaller than the total reflection angle, it is emitted from the DMD 500R. Then, the red component light R reflected by the surface 82 after being reflected by the surface 81 passes through the surface 81.
  • the surface 82 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the green component light G and reflects the red component light R. Accordingly, among the light transmitted through the surface 81, the green component light G is transmitted through the surface 82, and the red component light R is reflected by the surface 82. The red component light R reflected by the surface 81 is reflected by the surface 82. The green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G passes through the surface 82.
  • the prism 70 separates the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B by the surface 72.
  • the prism 80 separates the red component light R and the green component light G by the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color separation element that separates each color component light.
  • the cutoff wavelength of the surface 72 of the prism 70 is provided between the wavelength band corresponding to green and the wavelength band corresponding to blue.
  • the cut-off wavelength of the surface 82 of the prism 80 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to red and a wavelength band corresponding to green.
  • the prism 70 combines the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B with the surface 72.
  • the prism 80 combines the red component light R and the green component light G with the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color composition element that synthesizes each color component light.
  • the prism 90 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 91.
  • the surface 91 is configured to transmit the green component light G.
  • the green component light G incident on the DMD 500G and the green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G pass through the surface 91.
  • DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B are configured by a plurality of micromirrors, and the plurality of micromirrors are movable. Each minute mirror basically corresponds to one pixel.
  • the DMD 500R switches whether to reflect the red component light R toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror.
  • the DMD 500G and the DMD 500B switch whether to reflect the green component light G and the blue component light B toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror.
  • the projection unit 150 includes a projection lens group 151 and a concave mirror 152.
  • the projection lens group 151 emits light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 to the concave mirror 152 side.
  • the concave mirror 152 reflects light (image light) emitted from the projection lens group 151.
  • the concave mirror 152 condenses the image light and then widens the image light.
  • the concave mirror 152 is an aspherical mirror having a concave surface on the projection lens group 151 side.
  • the image light collected by the concave mirror 152 passes through a transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 of the top plate recess 180 provided on the top plate 240.
  • the transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the position where the image light is collected by the concave mirror 152.
  • the concave mirror 152 is accommodated in the space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 as described above.
  • the concave mirror 152 is preferably fixed inside the front side convex portion 170.
  • the shape of the inner surface of the front side convex portion 170 is preferably a shape along the concave mirror 152.
  • FIG. 34 shows the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B in detail.
  • the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B include an incident side microlens array 310, an element substrate 320, an emission side microlens array 312, and vibration applying means (not shown).
  • the incident side microlens array 310 is an aggregate of hemispherical microlenses formed innumerably on the light incident surface side of the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B. is there.
  • Each lens of the incident side microlens array 310 is a microlens having a refractive index of n and a focal length of f.
  • the element substrate 320 has the incident side microlens array 310 and the emission side microlens array 312 fixed with an ultraviolet curing adhesive.
  • the element substrate 320 is a transparent substrate having a refractive index n and a thickness W. Note that the thickness W of the element substrate 320 is “2f / n” ⁇ “error”. In other words, the thickness W of the element substrate 320 may not be strictly the same as “2f / n”, and may be approximately “2f / n”.
  • the emission side microlens array 312 is an aggregate of hemispherical microlenses formed innumerably on the light emission surface side of the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B. is there.
  • Each lens of the exit side microlens array 312 is a microlens having a refractive index n and a focal length f.
  • the incident side microlens array 310, the element substrate 320, and the emission side microlens array 312 are fixed with an ultraviolet curable adhesive, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the side microlens array 312 may be formed by integral molding. By doing so, it is not necessary to attach the incident side microlens array 310, the element substrate 320, and the emission side microlens array 312 or to adjust the optical axis.
  • the optical path of light traveling through the speckle noise reducing element 20R, the speckle noise reducing element 20G, and the speckle noise reducing element 20B will be described with reference to FIG.
  • Light emitted from the emission end faces of the rod integrator 10R, rod integrator 10G, and rod integrator 10B is incident on the incident side microlens array 310 that is separated by a distance 2f.
  • the light incident on the incident side microlens array 310 is refracted and passes through the inside of the incident side microlens array 310 and the element substrate 320. Refraction occurs only on the incident surface of the incident side microlens array 310, and no refraction occurs on the boundary surface between the incident side microlens array 310 and the element substrate 320 having the same refractive index.
  • the thickness of the element substrate 320 is approximately 2 f / n, the light that has passed through the element substrate 320 is imaged by the emission-side microlens array 312 fixed to the emission side of the element substrate 320.
  • the focal length of the exit side microlens array 312 is f and is the same as that of the entrance side microlens array 310, the entrance side divergence angle ⁇ and the exit side divergence angle ⁇ are the same.
  • the exit-side divergence angle ⁇ is the same as the incident-side divergence angle ⁇ , it is difficult to generate light at an angle that cannot be taken into the projection lens 151, and light loss used for the projected image is unlikely to occur.
  • the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B are vibrated, oscillated, or rotated, so that the optical path length of incident light changes with time, and the speckle noise reduction element.
  • a phenomenon in which the emission position and phase of the light emitted from the light changes with time will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • FIG. 35 (a) is a view focusing on a pair of microlenses of the incident side microlens array 310 and the emission side microlens array 312.
  • FIG. 35 (a) is a view focusing on a pair of microlenses of the incident side microlens array 310 and the emission side microlens array 312.
  • the light emitted from the emission end faces of the rod integrator 10R, the rod integrator 10G, and the rod integrator 10B is incident on the incident-side microlens 311 that is separated by a distance 2f.
  • the light incident on the incident side microlens 311 is refracted and passes through the inside of the incident side microlens 311 and the element substrate 320. Refraction occurs only on the incident surface of the incident side microlens 311, and no refraction occurs on the boundary surface between the incident side microlens 311 and the element substrate 320 having the same refractive index.
  • the thickness of the element substrate 320 is approximately 2 f / n, the light passing through the element substrate 320 forms an image at the center of the emission side microlens 313 fixed to the emission side of the element substrate 320.
  • FIG. 35B shows an optical path of light when the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B move upward due to vibration with respect to FIG. FIG.
  • FIG. 35C shows the optical path of light when the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B move downward due to vibration with respect to FIG. FIG.
  • the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B vibrate up and down the positions where the emission light of the emission side microlens is emitted are shown in FIGS. c) is different.
  • the speckle noise reducing element 20R, the speckle noise reducing element 20G, and the speckle noise reducing element 20B vibrate up and down the light passing through the different optical path lengths shown in FIGS. 35 (a), (b), and (c). Will be imaged. Therefore, the light emitted from the emission side microlens is emitted from the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B as light having different phases.
  • the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B emit all the incident light when the light emitted from the distance of 2f is within the incident side divergence angle ⁇ .
  • the light can be emitted within an angle ⁇ .
  • the emission-side divergence angle ⁇ is the same as the incident-side divergence angle ⁇ compared to the basic configuration of the speckle noise reduction element. Therefore, it is difficult to generate light at an angle that cannot be captured by the projection lens, and it is difficult to cause light loss used in a projected image.
  • the element substrate 320 is disposed between the incident-side microlens array 310 and the emission-side microlens array 312, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the incident-side microlens array 310 and the emission-side microlens array 310 are arranged.
  • the side microlens array 312 may be arranged independently, and each distance may be separated by 2f.
  • the light source unit 110 includes a red coherent light source 111R, a green coherent light source 111G, and a blue coherent light source 111B
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes the rod integrator 10R and the rod integrator 10G.
  • a rod integrator 10R, a rod integrator 10R that becomes a substantially conjugate plane of the screen surface, a speckle noise reduction element R20, a speckle noise reduction element G20, immediately before the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10G and the rod integrator 10B, and A speckle noise reduction element B20 was arranged.
  • the light source unit 110 has a white coherent light source
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 has a single rod integrator 10 ⁇ / b> W on a substantially conjugate surface of the screen surface.
  • a speckle noise reduction element W20 is disposed immediately before the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the incident side microlens array 310 and the emission side microlens array 312 are described as having the same focal length f.
  • Modification 2 a case will be described in which the focal length of the exit-side microlens array 312 is different from the focal length f of the incident-side microlens array 310 (the focal length is f ′).
  • the light incident on the incident side microlens array 310 is refracted and passes through the inside of the incident side microlens array 310 and the element substrate 320.
  • the light that has passed through the inside of the element substrate 320 has a focal length f ′ of the emission-side microlens array 312, so that if the thickness of the element substrate 320 is approximately (f + f ′) / n, An image is formed by the fixed exit side microlens array 312.
  • the relationship between the focal length f and the focal length f ′ satisfies f ⁇ f ′.
  • the relationship between the incident-side divergence angle ⁇ and the emission-side divergence angle ⁇ satisfies ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ . Therefore, light at an angle that cannot be captured by the projection lens 151 is unlikely to be generated, and light loss used for the projected image is unlikely to occur.
  • the exit side microlens array 312 needs to be composed of n ⁇ m microlenses.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating the color separation / synthesis unit 140 and the projection unit 150 according to the first modification. 35, the same code
  • a speckle reduction element W20 is provided instead of the speckle noise reduction element R20, the speckle noise reduction element G20, and the speckle noise reduction element B20.
  • the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a rod integrator 10W instead of the rod integrator 10R, the rod integrator 10G, and the rod integrator 10B.
  • the color separation / combination unit 140 includes a lens 21W instead of the lens 21R, the lens 21G, and the lens 21B.
  • White light is incident on the rod integrator 10W from the bundle portion 114W.
  • white light is emitted from the bundle unit 114W.
  • the bundle unit 114W may bundle optical fibers that transmit white light emitted from a light source (LD or the like).
  • a plurality of coherent light sources that emit white light are provided as the plurality of coherent light sources.
  • the bundle unit 114W may bundle the optical fiber 113R, the optical fiber 113G, and the optical fiber 113B.
  • a red coherent light source 111R, a green coherent light source 111G, and a blue coherent light source 111B are provided as a plurality of coherent light sources.
  • the lens 21 ⁇ / b> W is a relay lens that relays white light so that each DMD 500 is irradiated with white light.
  • the fourth embodiment exemplifies a case in which the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto a projection plane 300 provided on the floor (floor projection).
  • the arrangement of the casing 200 in such a case is referred to as a floor projection arrangement.
  • FIG. 36 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto a projection plane 300 provided on the floor (floor projection).
  • the first arrangement surface that is substantially parallel to the projection surface 300 is the floor surface 410.
  • a second arrangement surface that is substantially perpendicular to the first arrangement surface is a wall surface 420.
  • a horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “width direction”.
  • the normal direction of the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “height direction”.
  • a direction orthogonal to both the width direction and the height direction is referred to as a “depth direction”.
  • the housing 200 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape as in the third embodiment.
  • the size of the housing 200 in the depth direction and the size of the housing 200 in the height direction are smaller than the size of the housing 200 in the width direction.
  • the size of the housing 200 in the height direction is substantially equal to the projection distance from the reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 30) to the projection plane 300.
  • the size of the casing 200 is substantially equal to the size of the projection plane 300.
  • the size of the casing 200 is determined according to the distance from the wall surface 420 to the projection plane 300.
  • the projection surface side wall 210 is a plate-like member facing a first arrangement surface (in the fourth embodiment, the floor surface 410) substantially parallel to the projection surface 300.
  • the front side wall 220 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the projection plane side wall 210.
  • the top plate 240 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the bottom plate 230.
  • the bottom plate 230 is a plate-like member that faces a second arrangement surface (in the fourth embodiment, a wall surface 420) other than the first arrangement surface substantially parallel to the projection plane 300.
  • the first side wall 250 and the second side wall 260 are plate-like members that form both ends of the housing 200 in the width direction.
  • a red coherent light source, a green coherent light source, a blue coherent light source, or a white coherent light source may be used.
  • three diffusion surfaces provided on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110 may be provided. In such a case, it is only necessary that at least two of the three diffusion surfaces vibrate.
  • the light source unit 110 may include a red solid light source that emits red component light R, a green solid light source that emits green component light G, and a blue solid light source that emits blue component light B.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 is disposed on each optical path of the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B.
  • the projection display apparatus 100 corresponding to the DLP method is exemplified. Further, in the embodiment, the projection display apparatus 100 that performs wall surface projection is illustrated. However, the embodiment can be applied to any projection video display apparatus that uses a light source that emits coherent light.
  • the mode is selected according to the distance between the screen and the viewer.
  • the mode may be selected in accordance with the distance between the screen and the viewer and the detection result by detecting the size of the projected image (degree of zoom), brightness, screen type, and the like.
  • the diffusing optical element 600 is provided on the light exit side of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the embodiment is not limited to this.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 may be provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 is illustrated as an example of the uniformizing optical element.
  • the homogenizing optical element may be any optical element as long as it makes the spatial distribution of light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit uniform.
  • the homogenizing optical element may be a diffraction grating or a microlens array.
  • the diffraction pattern (unevenness pattern) of the diffraction grating is designed so that the spatial distribution of the light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit is made uniform.
  • the microlens array is designed such that the radius of curvature (R) of the lens in the central region is smaller than the radius of curvature (R) of the lens in the peripheral region. That is, since the radius of curvature (R) of the lens in the central region is small, the light diffusivity increases, and since the radius of curvature of the lens in the peripheral region is large, the light diffusivity decreases.
  • the diffusion optical element 600 has a central region and a peripheral region is illustrated.
  • the diffusivity distribution of the diffusing optical element 600 may be designed to make the spatial distribution of the light intensity uniform on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit.
  • the diffusivity of the diffusion optical element 600 may gradually decrease from the center toward the outside.
  • an area where the intensity of the light emitted from the light source is small (for example, 1 of the maximum intensity), with the area where the intensity of the light emitted from the light source is large (for example, an area larger than 1 ⁇ 2 of the maximum intensity) as the central area.
  • a region smaller than / 2) may be set as the peripheral region.
  • the size of the central region is preferably smaller than the size of the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10W.
  • the projection plane 300 is provided on the wall surface 420 on which the casing 200 is arranged, but the embodiment is not limited to this.
  • the projection plane 300 may be provided at a position deeper than the wall surface 420 in the direction away from the housing 200.
  • the projection plane 300 is provided on the floor surface 410 on which the casing 200 is arranged, but the embodiment is not limited to this.
  • the projection plane 300 may be provided at a position lower than the floor surface 410.
  • a DMD Digital Micromirror Device
  • the light modulation element may be a transmissive liquid crystal panel or a reflective liquid crystal panel.
  • a plurality of DMDs are provided as light modulation elements, but a single DMD may be provided as a light modulation element.
  • Japanese Patent Application No. 2009-224666 (filed on September 29, 2009), Japanese Patent Application No. 2009-235648 (filed on October 9, 2009), Japanese Patent Application No. 2010-041051 ( The entire contents of Japanese Patent Application No. 2010-042957 (filed on Feb. 26, 2010) are incorporated herein by reference.
  • an optical unit a projection display apparatus, and a diffusing optical element that can appropriately achieve both speckle noise removal and brightness reduction suppression.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Projection Apparatus (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed is a projection image display device which is provided with: a light source (110) which emits light having coherency; a light modulation element (500), which modules the light emitted from the light source; and a projection unit (150) which projects, to a projection surface, the light emitted from the light modulation element. The projection image display device is also provided with a speckle noise reducing element (600) provided between the light source and the light modulation element, and a control unit which controls first mode and second mode. The control unit controls the speckle noise reducing element such that speckles are reduced in the first mode compared with those in the second mode.

Description

光学ユニット、投写型映像表示装置及び拡散光学素子Optical unit, projection display apparatus, and diffusion optical element

 本発明は、可干渉性を有する光を出射する光源を備えた光学ユニット、投写型映像表示装置、可干渉性を有する光を拡散する拡散光学素子に関する。 The present invention relates to an optical unit including a light source that emits coherent light, a projection display apparatus, and a diffusion optical element that diffuses coherent light.

 従来、光源と、光源から出射された光を変調する光変調素子と、光変調素子から出射された光を投写面上に投写する投写ユニットとを有する投写型映像表示装置が知られている。 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a projection display apparatus having a light source, a light modulation element that modulates light emitted from the light source, and a projection unit that projects light emitted from the light modulation element onto a projection surface is known.

 近年では、主に映像光の高輝度化を図るために、投写型映像表示装置の光源としてレーザ光源を用いることが試みられている。 In recent years, an attempt has been made to use a laser light source as a light source of a projection display apparatus mainly for increasing the brightness of image light.

 ここで、レーザ光源から出射されるレーザ光は可干渉性(コヒーレンシ)を有するため、スペックルノイズが問題になる。スペックルノイズとは、投写ユニットから出射された映像光が投写面上で散乱し、散乱光が干渉することによって生じるノイズである。なお、スペックルノイズを低減する手法としては、以下に示す手法が提案されている。 Here, since the laser light emitted from the laser light source has coherence, speckle noise becomes a problem. Speckle noise is noise generated when image light emitted from the projection unit is scattered on the projection surface and the scattered light interferes. As a technique for reducing speckle noise, the following technique has been proposed.

 第1手法は、レーザ光の進行方向と平行な回転軸を中心として回転する円盤形状の拡散板によってレーザ光を拡散する手法である(例えば、特許文献1)。第2手法は、2つの拡散板によってレーザ光を拡散する手法である(例えば、特許文献2)。 The first method is a method of diffusing laser light by a disk-shaped diffusion plate that rotates around a rotation axis parallel to the traveling direction of the laser light (for example, Patent Document 1). The second method is a method of diffusing laser light with two diffusion plates (for example, Patent Document 2).

 ところで、第1手法及び第2手法では、スペックルノイズを低減するために拡散板を用いるが、拡散板によってレーザ光を拡散すると、投写面上に投写される光の輝度が低下する。すなわち、スペックルノイズを除去する効果及び投写面に表示される映像の輝度は、トレードオフの関係を有する。 Incidentally, in the first method and the second method, a diffusing plate is used to reduce speckle noise. However, when the laser light is diffused by the diffusing plate, the brightness of the light projected on the projection surface is lowered. That is, the effect of removing speckle noise and the luminance of the image displayed on the projection surface have a trade-off relationship.

特開2008-122823号公報JP 2008-122823 A 特開2008-134269号公報JP 2008-134269 A

 第1の特徴に係る投写型映像表示装置は、可干渉性を有する光を出射する光源(光源ユニット110)と、前記光源から出射された光を変調する光変調素子(DMD500)と、前記光変調素子から出射された光を投写面に投写する投写ユニット(投写ユニット150)とを備える。投写型映像表示装置は、前記光源と前記光変調素子との間に設けられたスペックルノイズ低減素子と、第1モードと第2モードとを制御する制御部(制御ユニット800)とを備える。前記制御部は、前記第1モードにおいて、前記第2モードよりもスペックルが低減されるように、前記スペックルノイズ低減素子を制御する。 A projection display apparatus according to a first feature includes a light source (light source unit 110) that emits coherent light, a light modulation element (DMD 500) that modulates light emitted from the light source, and the light. A projection unit (projection unit 150) that projects the light emitted from the modulation element onto the projection surface. The projection display apparatus includes a speckle noise reduction element provided between the light source and the light modulation element, and a control unit (control unit 800) that controls the first mode and the second mode. The control unit controls the speckle noise reduction element so that speckle is reduced in the first mode than in the second mode.

 第2の特徴に係る投写型映像表示装置は、可干渉性を有する光を出射する光源(光源ユニット110)と、前記光源から出射された光を変調する光変調素子(DMD500)と、前記光変調素子から出射された光を投写面に投写する投写ユニット(投写ユニット150)とを備える。投写型映像表示装置は、前記光源と前記光変調素子との間に設けられており、前記光源から出射される光を拡散するとともに、前記光源から出射される光を透過する拡散光学素子(拡散光学素子600)と、第1モードと第2モードとを制御する制御部(制御ユニット800)とを備える。前記制御部は、前記第1モードにおいて、前記第2モードよりも高い拡散度で、前記光源から出射される光を拡散するように前記拡散光学素子を制御する。 A projection display apparatus according to a second feature includes a light source (light source unit 110) that emits coherent light, a light modulation element (DMD 500) that modulates light emitted from the light source, and the light. A projection unit (projection unit 150) that projects the light emitted from the modulation element onto the projection surface. The projection display apparatus is provided between the light source and the light modulation element, and diffuses light emitted from the light source and diffuses light emitted from the light source (diffusion optical element). And an optical element 600) and a control unit (control unit 800) for controlling the first mode and the second mode. The control unit controls the diffusing optical element so as to diffuse light emitted from the light source in the first mode with a higher diffusivity than in the second mode.

 第2の特徴において、前記拡散光学素子は、前記光源から出射される光の進行方向において、複数の拡散面を有する。前記制御部は、前記複数の拡散面が異なる動作パターンで動作するように前記拡散光学素子を制御する。 In the second feature, the diffusion optical element has a plurality of diffusion surfaces in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source. The control unit controls the diffusion optical element so that the plurality of diffusion surfaces operate with different operation patterns.

 第2の特徴において、前記拡散光学素子は、第1回転軸を中心として回転する第1回転体と、前記第1回転軸と平行な第2回転軸を中心として回転する第2回転体と、前記第1回転体及び前記第2回転体に無端ループ状に巻き掛けられた帯状の拡散シートとを含む。前記帯状の拡散シートは、前記光源から出射される光の進行方向において、2つの拡散面を構成する。前記制御部は、前記第1回転体及び前記第2回転体の回転に伴って、2つの拡散面が互いに逆方向に移動するように前記拡散光学素子を制御する。 In the second feature, the diffusion optical element includes a first rotating body that rotates about a first rotation axis, a second rotating body that rotates about a second rotation axis that is parallel to the first rotation axis, and A strip-shaped diffusion sheet wound in an endless loop around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The strip-shaped diffusion sheet constitutes two diffusion surfaces in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source. The controller controls the diffusing optical element such that two diffusing surfaces move in opposite directions with the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

 第2の特徴において、前記制御部は、前記複数の拡散面のうち、1つの拡散面が止まるときに、他の拡散面が動くように前記拡散光学素子を制御する。 In the second feature, the control unit controls the diffusion optical element so that when one diffusion surface of the plurality of diffusion surfaces stops, the other diffusion surface moves.

 第2の特徴において、前記拡散光学素子は、第1拡散板及び第2拡散板を含む。前記制御部は、前記第1拡散板及び前記第2拡散板が異なる方向に沿って振動するように前記拡散光学素子を制御する。 In the second feature, the diffusing optical element includes a first diffusing plate and a second diffusing plate. The control unit controls the diffusion optical element so that the first diffusion plate and the second diffusion plate vibrate along different directions.

 第2の特徴において、前記拡散光学素子は、拡散度が異なる複数の拡散領域を有する。前記制御部は、前記第2モードにおいて、前記第1モードで用いる拡散領域よりも低い拡散度を有する拡散領域を用いて、前記光源から出射される光を拡散するように前記拡散光学素子を制御する。 In the second feature, the diffusion optical element has a plurality of diffusion regions having different diffusivities. In the second mode, the control unit controls the diffusing optical element so as to diffuse light emitted from the light source by using a diffusion region having a lower diffusivity than the diffusion region used in the first mode. To do.

 第3の特徴に係る拡散光学素子は、可干渉性を有する光を拡散するとともに、可干渉性を有する光を透過する。拡散光学素子は、第1回転軸を中心として回転する第1回転体と、前記第1回転軸と平行な第2回転軸を中心として回転する第2回転体と、前記第1回転体及び前記第2回転体に無端ループ状に巻き掛けられた帯状の拡散シートとを備える。前記帯状の拡散シートは、互いに逆方向に移動する2つの拡散面を構成する。 The diffusing optical element according to the third feature diffuses coherent light and transmits coherent light. The diffusion optical element includes: a first rotating body that rotates about a first rotating shaft; a second rotating body that rotates about a second rotating shaft that is parallel to the first rotating shaft; the first rotating body; A belt-shaped diffusion sheet wound in an endless loop around the second rotating body. The strip-shaped diffusion sheet constitutes two diffusion surfaces that move in opposite directions.

 第4の特徴に係る投写型映像表示装置は、可干渉性を有する光を出射する光源(光源ユニット110)と、前記光源から出射された光を変調する光変調素子(DMD500)と、前記光変調素子から出射された光を投写面に投写する投写ユニット(投写ユニット150)と、前記光源から出射された光が前記光変調素子に照射されるように前記光源から出射された光を中継するリレー光学系(例えば、レンズ21W、レンズ23、レンズ40)とを備える。投写型映像表示装置は、前記投写ユニットの射出瞳面における光強度の空間分布を均一化する均一化光学素子(例えば、拡散光学素子600)を備える。 A projection display apparatus according to a fourth feature includes a light source (light source unit 110) that emits coherent light, a light modulation element (DMD 500) that modulates light emitted from the light source, and the light. A projection unit (projection unit 150) that projects light emitted from the modulation element onto a projection plane, and relays the light emitted from the light source so that the light emitted from the light source is applied to the light modulation element. A relay optical system (for example, lens 21W, lens 23, lens 40). The projection display apparatus includes a uniformizing optical element (for example, a diffusing optical element 600) that uniformizes the spatial distribution of the light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit.

 第4の特徴において、前記均一化光学素子は、前記光源と前記光変調素子との間に設けられており、前記光源から出射される光を拡散するとともに、前記光源から出射される光を透過する拡散光学素子である。前記拡散光学素子は、前記光源から出射された光軸中心を含む中心領域と、前記中心領域の周辺に設けられる周辺領域とを含む。前記中心領域の拡散度は、前記周辺領域の拡散度よりも大きい。 In the fourth feature, the uniformizing optical element is provided between the light source and the light modulation element, and diffuses light emitted from the light source and transmits light emitted from the light source. A diffusing optical element. The diffusing optical element includes a central region including an optical axis center emitted from the light source, and a peripheral region provided around the central region. The diffusivity of the central region is greater than the diffusivity of the peripheral region.

 第4の特徴において、投写型映像表示装置は、所定動作パターンで動作するように前記均一化光学素子を制御する制御部(制御ユニット800)をさらに備える。 In the fourth feature, the projection display apparatus further includes a control unit (control unit 800) for controlling the uniformizing optical element so as to operate in a predetermined operation pattern.

 第5の特徴に係る拡散光学素子は、可干渉性を有する光を拡散するとともに、可干渉性を有する光を透過する拡散領域を有する。前記拡散領域は、可干渉性を有する光の光軸中心を含む中心領域と、前記中心領域の周辺に設けられる周辺領域とを含む。前記中心領域の拡散度は、前記周辺領域の拡散度よりも大きい。 The diffusing optical element according to the fifth feature has a diffusing region that diffuses coherent light and diffuses coherent light. The diffusion region includes a central region including an optical axis center of coherent light and a peripheral region provided around the central region. The diffusivity of the central region is greater than the diffusivity of the peripheral region.

 第6の特徴に係る光学ユニット(例えば、スペックルノイズ低減素子20R)は、一対のレンズアレイ(入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310および出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312)と、前記一対のレンズアレイを振動させる振動付与手段と、を備えることを要旨とする。 The optical unit according to the sixth feature (for example, speckle noise reduction element 20R) includes a pair of lens arrays (incident side microlens array 310 and exit side microlens array 312) and vibration that vibrates the pair of lens arrays. And providing means.

 ここで、振動とは、所定の範囲で周期的に変化する動きであればよく、直線的な動きのほか、回転、揺動などを含む。 Here, the vibration may be a movement that periodically changes within a predetermined range, and includes a linear movement, rotation, swinging, and the like.

 この態様によれば、スペックルノイズを低減させることができ、しかも入射する光の発散角が増大することを抑制できる。 According to this aspect, speckle noise can be reduced, and an increase in the divergence angle of incident light can be suppressed.

 第6の特徴において、前記一対のレンズアレイは、焦点距離fを有する第1のレンズアレイ(入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310)と焦点距離f’を有する第2のレンズアレイと(出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312)を有し、前記第1のレンズアレイと前記第2のレンズアレイとの間に絶対屈折率nの媒質が間挿されるとき、前記第1のレンズアレイと前記第2のレンズアレイとは、略(f+f’)/nの間隔を設けて配されるとよい。 In the sixth feature, the pair of lens arrays includes a first lens array having a focal length f (incident side microlens array 310), a second lens array having a focal length f ′, and an outgoing side microlens array. 312), and when a medium having an absolute refractive index n is interposed between the first lens array and the second lens array, the first lens array and the second lens array , Approximately (f + f ′) / n.

 すなわち、第1のレンズアレイと第2のレンズアレイとが同じ焦点距離fであれば、略2f/nの間隔を有すればよく、第1のレンズアレイと第2のレンズアレイとの間が空気であれば、略f+f’の間隔を有すればよい。 That is, if the first lens array and the second lens array have the same focal length f, the distance between the first lens array and the second lens array may be approximately 2f / n. If it is air, it is sufficient to have an interval of approximately f + f ′.

 また、第7の特徴に係る投写型映像表示装置(投写型映像表示装置100)は、コヒーレント光源によって構成される光源ユニット(光源ユニット110)と、該光源ユニットから出射される光の光軸に略直交する方向へ振動する光学ユニット(例えば、スペックルノイズ低減素子20R)と、前記光源ユニットから出射される光を変調する光変調素子(例えば、DMD500R)と、該光変調素子により変調された光を投写する投写ユニット(投写ユニット150)と、を備えるものである。前記光学ユニットは、一対のレンズアレイ(入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310および出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312)を備えることを要旨とする。 A projection display apparatus (projection display apparatus 100) according to the seventh feature includes a light source unit (light source unit 110) configured by a coherent light source and an optical axis of light emitted from the light source unit. An optical unit that vibrates in a substantially orthogonal direction (for example, speckle noise reduction element 20R), a light modulation element (for example, DMD500R) that modulates light emitted from the light source unit, and modulated by the light modulation element A projection unit that projects light (projection unit 150). The optical unit includes a pair of lens arrays (an incident side microlens array 310 and an emission side microlens array 312).

 第7の特徴によれば、コヒーレント光源を用いた投写型映像表示装置に係るスペックルノイズを減少させ、光の発散角が増大することによる光損失を減少させることができる。 According to the seventh feature, speckle noise related to a projection display apparatus using a coherent light source can be reduced, and light loss due to an increase in light divergence angle can be reduced.

 第7の特徴において、前記光学ユニットに入射する光の発散角がθであるとき、前記一対のレンズアレイのうち少なくとも入射側に配置されるレンズアレイ(入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310)は、tanθ<d/4fの条件を満たすように、各レンズ(入射側マイクロレンズ311)のレンズ直径dおよび焦点距離fが設定されるとよい。 In the seventh feature, when a divergence angle of light incident on the optical unit is θ, a lens array (incident side microlens array 310) arranged at least on the incident side of the pair of lens arrays has tan θ < The lens diameter d and focal length f of each lens (incident side microlens 311) may be set so as to satisfy the condition of d / 4f.

図1は、第1実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100の概略構成を示す図である。FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment. 図2は、第1実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100の概略構成を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment. 図3は、第1実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100の光学構成を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an optical configuration of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment. 図4は、第1実施形態に係る拡散光学素子600の第1構成例を示す図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the first embodiment. 図5は、第1実施形態に係る拡散光学素子600の第2構成例を示す図である。FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the first embodiment. 図6は、第1実施形態に係る拡散光学素子600の第3構成例を示す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a third configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the first embodiment. 図7は、第1実施形態に係る制御ユニット800を示すブロック図である。FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the control unit 800 according to the first embodiment. 図8は、第1実施形態に係る外部インタフェース810を説明するための図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the external interface 810 according to the first embodiment. 図9は、第1実施形態に係る外部インタフェース810を説明するための図である。FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the external interface 810 according to the first embodiment. 図10は、第1実施形態に係る外部インタフェース810を説明するための図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the external interface 810 according to the first embodiment. 図11は、変更例1に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification. 図12は、変更例1に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification. 図13は、変更例1に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。FIG. 13 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification. 図14は、変更例2に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the second modification. 図15は、変更例2に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。FIG. 15 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the second modification. 図16は、変更例2に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the second modification. 図17は、変更例3に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。FIG. 17 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the third modification. 図18は、変更例3に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。FIG. 18 is a view showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the third modification. 図19は、第2実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100の概略構成を示す図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment. 図20は、第2実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100の概略構成を示す図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment. 図21は、第2実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100の光学構成を示す図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an optical configuration of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment. 図22は、第2実施形態に係る拡散光学素子600の第1構成例を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the second embodiment. 図23は、第2実施形態に係る拡散光学素子600の第2構成例を示す図である。FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the second embodiment. 図24は、第2実施形態に係る制御ユニット800を示すブロック図である。FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing a control unit 800 according to the second embodiment. 図25は、従来技術に係る光強度の空間分布について説明するための図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the spatial distribution of light intensity according to the related art. 図26は、従来技術に係る光強度の空間分布について説明するための図である。FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the spatial distribution of light intensity according to the related art. 図27は、第2実施形態に係る光強度の空間分布について説明するための図である。FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the spatial distribution of the light intensity according to the second embodiment. 図28は、第2実施形態に係る光強度の空間分布について説明するための図である。FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the spatial distribution of the light intensity according to the second embodiment. 図29は、第3実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を示す斜視図である。FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment. 図30は、第3実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を側方から見た図である。FIG. 30 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment. 図31は、第3実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を上方から見た図である。FIG. 31 is a top view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment. 図32は、第3実施形態に係る光源ユニット110を示す図である。FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the light source unit 110 according to the third embodiment. 図33は、第3実施形態に係る色分離合成ユニット140及び投写ユニット150を示す図である。FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a color separation / synthesis unit 140 and a projection unit 150 according to the third embodiment. 図34は、第3実施形態に係るスペックルノイズ低減素子の詳細図である。FIG. 34 is a detailed view of the speckle noise reduction element according to the third embodiment. 図35(a)は、第3実施形態に係るスペックルノイズ低減素子を通過する光の光路図である。図35(b)は、第3実施形態に係るスペックルノイズ低減素子が振動により図35(a)よりも上方に動いた際に通過する光の光路図である。図35(c)は、第3実施形態に係るスペックルノイズ低減素子が振動により図35(a)よりも下方に動いた際に通過する光の光路図である。FIG. 35A is an optical path diagram of light passing through the speckle noise reduction element according to the third embodiment. FIG. 35B is an optical path diagram of light that passes when the speckle noise reduction element according to the third embodiment moves upward from FIG. 35A due to vibration. FIG. 35C is an optical path diagram of light that passes when the speckle noise reduction element according to the third embodiment moves below the position in FIG. 35A due to vibration. 図36は、変更例1に係る色分離合成ユニット140及び投写ユニット150を示す図である。FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating the color separation / synthesis unit 140 and the projection unit 150 according to the first modification. 図37は、第4実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を側方から見た図である。FIG. 37 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the fourth embodiment.

 次に、図面を参照して、本発明の実施形態を説明する。以下の実施形態における図面の記載において、同一又は類似の部分には同一又は類似の符号を付している。 Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the drawings in the following embodiments, the same or similar parts are denoted by the same or similar reference numerals.

 ただし、図面は模式的なものであり、各寸法の比率などは現実のものとは異なることに留意すべきである。従って、具体的な寸法などは以下の説明を参酌して判断すべきである。また、図面相互間においても互いの寸法の関係や比率が異なる部分が含まれていることは勿論である。 However, it should be noted that the drawings are schematic and ratios of dimensions are different from actual ones. Therefore, specific dimensions and the like should be determined in consideration of the following description. Moreover, it is a matter of course that portions having different dimensional relationships and ratios are included between the drawings.

 [第1実施形態の概要]
 (第1実施形態の構成)
 第1実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置は、可干渉性を有する光を出射する光源と、光源から出射された光を変調する光変調素子と、光変調素子から出射された光を投写面に投写する投写ユニットとを備える。投写型映像表示装置は、光源と光変調素子との間に設けられており、光源から出射される光を拡散するとともに、光源から出射される光を透過する拡散光学素子と、第1モードと第2モードとを制御する制御部とを備える。制御部は、第1モードにおいて、第2モードよりも高い拡散度で、光源から出射される光を拡散するように拡散光学素子を制御する。
[Outline of First Embodiment]
(Configuration of the first embodiment)
The projection display apparatus according to the first embodiment includes a light source that emits coherent light, a light modulation element that modulates light emitted from the light source, and a projection surface that emits light emitted from the light modulation element. A projection unit for projecting to the projector. The projection display apparatus is provided between the light source and the light modulation element, diffuses light emitted from the light source and transmits light emitted from the light source, and a first mode. A control unit for controlling the second mode. The control unit controls the diffusion optical element in the first mode so as to diffuse the light emitted from the light source with a higher diffusivity than in the second mode.

 第1実施形態では、制御部は、第1モードにおいて、第2モードよりも高い拡散度で、光源から出射される光を拡散するように拡散光学素子を制御する。すなわち、第1モードでは、第2モードと比べて、拡散度が高いため、スペックルノイズが効果的に除去される。一方で、第2モードでは、第1モードと比べて、拡散度が低いため、輝度低下が抑制される。すなわち、モードの切り替えによって、スペックルノイズの除去及び輝度低下抑制を適切に両立することができる。 In the first embodiment, the control unit controls the diffusion optical element in the first mode so as to diffuse the light emitted from the light source with a higher diffusivity than in the second mode. That is, in the first mode, speckle noise is effectively removed because the degree of diffusion is higher than in the second mode. On the other hand, in the second mode, since the diffusivity is lower than that in the first mode, a decrease in luminance is suppressed. That is, it is possible to appropriately achieve both speckle noise removal and luminance reduction suppression by switching modes.

 [第1実施形態]
 (投写型映像表示装置の構成)
 以下において、第1実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置の構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図1は、第1実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を示す斜視図である。図2は、第1実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を側方から見た図である。
[First Embodiment]
(Configuration of projection display device)
Hereinafter, the configuration of the projection display apparatus according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment.

 図1及び図2に示すように、投写型映像表示装置100は、筐体200を有しており、投写面300に映像を投写する。以下においては、投写型映像表示装置100が壁面に設けられた投写面300に映像光を投写するケースについて例示する(壁面投写)。 As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the projection display apparatus 100 has a housing 200 and projects an image on the projection plane 300. In the following, a case where the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto the projection plane 300 provided on the wall surface will be exemplified (wall surface projection).

 このようなケースにおける筐体200の配置を壁面投写配置と称する。具体的には、投写型映像表示装置100は、壁面420と、壁面420に略垂直な床面410とに沿って配置される。 The arrangement of the casing 200 in such a case is referred to as a wall surface projection arrangement. Specifically, the projection display apparatus 100 is disposed along a wall surface 420 and a floor surface 410 that is substantially perpendicular to the wall surface 420.

 第1実施形態では、投写面300に平行な水平方向を“幅方向”と称する。投写面300の法線方向を“奥行き方向”と称する。幅方向及び奥行き方向の双方に直交する方向を“高さ方向”と称する。 In the first embodiment, a horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “width direction”. The normal direction of the projection plane 300 is referred to as “depth direction”. A direction orthogonal to both the width direction and the depth direction is referred to as a “height direction”.

 筐体200は、略直方体形状を有する。奥行き方向における筐体200のサイズ及び高さ方向における筐体200のサイズは、幅方向における筐体200のサイズよりも小さい。奥行き方向における筐体200のサイズは、反射ミラー(図2に示す凹面ミラー152)から投写面300までの投写距離と略等しい。幅方向において、筐体200のサイズは、投写面300のサイズと略等しい。高さ方向において、筐体200のサイズは、投写面300が設けられる位置に応じて定められる。 The housing 200 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The size of the housing 200 in the depth direction and the size of the housing 200 in the height direction are smaller than the size of the housing 200 in the width direction. The size of the casing 200 in the depth direction is substantially equal to the projection distance from the reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 2) to the projection plane 300. In the width direction, the size of the casing 200 is substantially equal to the size of the projection plane 300. In the height direction, the size of the housing 200 is determined according to the position where the projection plane 300 is provided.

 具体的には、筐体200は、投写面側側壁210と、前面側側壁220と、底面板230と、天板240と、第1側面側側壁250と、第2側面側側壁260とを有する。 Specifically, the housing 200 includes a projection surface side wall 210, a front surface side wall 220, a bottom plate 230, a top plate 240, a first side surface side wall 250, and a second side surface side wall 260. .

 投写面側側壁210は、投写面300と略平行な第1配置面(第1実施形態では、壁面420)と対向する板状の部材である。前面側側壁220は、投写面側側壁210の反対側に設けられた板状の部材である。底面板230は、床面410と対向する板状の部材である。天板240は、底面板230の反対側に設けられた板状の部材である。第1側面側側壁250及び第2側面側側壁260は、幅方向において筐体200の両端を形成する板状の部材である。 The projection surface side wall 210 is a plate-like member facing a first arrangement surface (in the first embodiment, a wall surface 420) substantially parallel to the projection surface 300. The front side wall 220 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the projection plane side wall 210. The bottom plate 230 is a plate-like member that faces the floor surface 410. The top plate 240 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the bottom plate 230. The first side wall 250 and the second side wall 260 are plate-like members that form both ends of the housing 200 in the width direction.

 筐体200は、光源ユニット110と、電源ユニット120と、冷却ユニット130と、色分離合成ユニット140と、投写ユニット150とを収容する。投写面側側壁210は、投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bを有する。前面側側壁220は、前面側凸部170を有する。天板240は、天板凹部180を有する。第1側面側側壁250は、ケーブル端子190を有する。 The housing 200 accommodates the light source unit 110, the power supply unit 120, the cooling unit 130, the color separation / combination unit 140, and the projection unit 150. The projection surface side sidewall 210 has a projection surface side recess 160A and a projection surface side recess 160B. The front side wall 220 has a front side convex portion 170. The top plate 240 has a top plate recess 180. The first side wall 250 has a cable terminal 190.

 光源ユニット110は、複数の光源(図3に示す固体光源111W)によって構成されるユニットである。各光源は、LD(Laser Diode)などの半導体レーザ素子である。第1実施形態では、複数の固体光源111Wは、可干渉性を有する白色光Wを出射する。光源ユニット110の詳細については後述する。 The light source unit 110 is a unit composed of a plurality of light sources (solid light sources 111W shown in FIG. 3). Each light source is a semiconductor laser element such as an LD (Laser Diode). In the first embodiment, the plurality of solid light sources 111W emit white light W having coherence. Details of the light source unit 110 will be described later.

 電源ユニット120は、投写型映像表示装置100に電力を供給するユニットである。例えば、電源ユニット120は、光源ユニット110及び冷却ユニット130に電力を供給する。 The power supply unit 120 is a unit that supplies power to the projection display apparatus 100. For example, the power supply unit 120 supplies power to the light source unit 110 and the cooling unit 130.

 冷却ユニット130は、光源ユニット110に設けられた複数の光源を冷却するユニットである。具体的には、冷却ユニット130は、各光源を載置する冷却ジャケットを冷却することによって、各光源を冷却する。 The cooling unit 130 is a unit that cools a plurality of light sources provided in the light source unit 110. Specifically, the cooling unit 130 cools each light source by cooling a cooling jacket on which each light source is placed.

 なお、冷却ユニット130は、各光源以外にも、電源ユニット120や光変調素子(後述するDMD500)を冷却するように構成されている。 The cooling unit 130 is configured to cool the power supply unit 120 and the light modulation element (DMD 500 described later) in addition to each light source.

 色分離合成ユニット140は、白色光Wを分離して、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを分離する。さらに、色分離合成ユニット140は、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを再合成して、映像光を投写ユニット150に出射する。色分離合成ユニット140の詳細については後述する(図3を参照)。 Color separation / combination unit 140 separates white light W and separates red component light R, green component light G, and blue component light B. Further, the color separation / combination unit 140 recombines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and emits image light to the projection unit 150. Details of the color separation / synthesis unit 140 will be described later (see FIG. 3).

 投写ユニット150は、色分離合成ユニット140から出射された光(映像光)を投写面300に投写する。具体的には、投写ユニット150は、色分離合成ユニット140から出射された光を投写面300上に投写する投写レンズ群(図3に示す投写レンズ群151)と、投写レンズ群から出射された光を投写面300側に反射する反射ミラー(図3に示す凹面ミラー152)とを有する。投写ユニット150の詳細については後述する。 The projection unit 150 projects the light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300. Specifically, the projection unit 150 includes a projection lens group (projection lens group 151 shown in FIG. 3) that projects the light emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300, and the projection lens group. A reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 3) that reflects light toward the projection surface 300; Details of the projection unit 150 will be described later.

 投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bは、投写面側側壁210に設けられており、筐体200の内側に窪む形状を有する。投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bは、筐体200の端まで延びている。投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bには、筐体200の内側に連通する通気口が設けられる。 The projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B are provided on the projection surface side wall 210 and have a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200. The projection surface side recess 160 </ b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 </ b> B extend to the end of the housing 200. The projection surface side recess 160 </ b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 </ b> B are provided with vent holes that communicate with the inside of the housing 200.

 第1実施形態では、投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bは、筐体200の幅方向に沿って延びている。例えば、投写面側凹部160Aには、筐体200の外側の空気を筐体200の内側に入れるための吸気口が通気口として設けられる。投写面側凹部160Bには、筐体200の内側の空気を筐体200の外側に出すための排気口が通気口として設けられる。 In the first embodiment, the projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B extend along the width direction of the housing 200. For example, the projection surface side recess 160 </ b> A is provided with an air inlet for allowing air outside the housing 200 to enter the housing 200 as a vent. The projection surface side recess 160 </ b> B is provided with an exhaust port for venting air inside the housing 200 to the outside of the housing 200 as a vent.

 前面側凸部170は、前面側側壁220に設けられており、筐体200の外側に張り出す形状を有する。前面側凸部170は、筐体200の幅方向において、前面側側壁220の略中央に設けられる。筐体200の内側において前面側凸部170によって形成される空間には、投写ユニット150に設けられた反射ミラー(図3に示す凹面ミラー152)が収容される。 The front side convex portion 170 is provided on the front side wall 220 and has a shape protruding to the outside of the housing 200. The front side convex portion 170 is provided at the approximate center of the front side wall 220 in the width direction of the housing 200. A reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 3) provided in the projection unit 150 is accommodated in a space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 inside the housing 200.

 天板凹部180は、天板240に設けられており、筐体200の内側に窪む形状を有する。天板凹部180は、投写面300側に向けて下る傾斜面181を有する。傾斜面181は、投写ユニット150から出射された光を投写面300側に透過(投写)する透過領域を有する。 The top plate recess 180 is provided in the top plate 240 and has a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200. The top plate recess 180 has an inclined surface 181 that goes down toward the projection plane 300 side. The inclined surface 181 has a transmission region that transmits (projects) the light emitted from the projection unit 150 to the projection surface 300 side.

 ケーブル端子190は、第1側面側側壁250に設けられており、電源端子や映像端子などの端子である。なお、ケーブル端子190は、第2側面側側壁260に設けられていてもよい。 The cable terminal 190 is provided on the first side wall 250 and is a terminal such as a power terminal or a video terminal. The cable terminal 190 may be provided on the second side wall 260.

 (光源ユニット、色分離合成ユニット及び投写ユニットの構成)
 以下において、第1実施形態に係る光源ユニット、色分離合成ユニット及び投写ユニットの構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図3は、第1実施形態に係る光源ユニット110、色分離合成ユニット140及び投写ユニット150を示す図である。第1実施形態では、DLP(Digital Light Processing)方式(登録商標)に対応する投写型映像表示装置100を例示する。
(Configuration of light source unit, color separation / synthesis unit and projection unit)
Hereinafter, configurations of the light source unit, the color separation / synthesis unit, and the projection unit according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the light source unit 110, the color separation / synthesis unit 140, and the projection unit 150 according to the first embodiment. The first embodiment exemplifies a projection display apparatus 100 that supports a DLP (Digital Light Processing) method (registered trademark).

 図3に示すように、光源ユニット110は、複数の固体光源111W、複数の光ファイバー113W及びバンドル部114Wを有する。固体光源111Wは、上述したように、可干渉性を有する白色光Wを出射するLDなどの半導体レーザ素子である。固体光源111Wには、光ファイバー113Wが接続される。 As shown in FIG. 3, the light source unit 110 includes a plurality of solid light sources 111W, a plurality of optical fibers 113W, and a bundle portion 114W. As described above, the solid-state light source 111W is a semiconductor laser element such as an LD that emits white light W having coherence. An optical fiber 113W is connected to the solid light source 111W.

 各固体光源111Wに接続された光ファイバー113Wは、バンドル部114Wで束ねられる。すなわち、各固体光源111Wから出射された光は、各光ファイバー113Wによって伝達されて、バンドル部114Wに集められる。固体光源111Wは、固体光源111Wを冷却するための冷却ジャケット(不図示)に載置される。 The optical fibers 113W connected to each solid light source 111W are bundled by a bundle portion 114W. That is, the light emitted from each solid light source 111W is transmitted by each optical fiber 113W and collected in the bundle portion 114W. The solid light source 111W is placed on a cooling jacket (not shown) for cooling the solid light source 111W.

 色分離合成ユニット140は、ロッドインテグレータ10W、レンズ21W、レンズ23、ミラー34及びミラー35を有する。また、色分離合成ユニット140は、拡散光学素子600を有する。 The color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a rod integrator 10W, a lens 21W, a lens 23, a mirror 34, and a mirror 35. The color separation / combination unit 140 includes a diffusion optical element 600.

 ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、光入射面と、光出射面と、光入射面の外周から光出射面の外周に亘って設けられる光反射側面とを有する。ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、バンドル部114Wで束ねられた光ファイバー113Wから出射される白色光Wを均一化する。すなわち、ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、光反射側面で白色光Wを反射することによって、白色光Wを均一化する。 The rod integrator 10W has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface. The rod integrator 10W makes the white light W emitted from the optical fiber 113W bundled by the bundle unit 114W uniform. That is, the rod integrator 10W makes the white light W uniform by reflecting the white light W on the light reflection side surface.

 なお、ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、光反射側面がミラー面によって構成された中空ロッドであってもよい。また、ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、ガラスなどによって構成された中実ロッドであってもよい。 The rod integrator 10W may be a hollow rod having a light reflection side surface constituted by a mirror surface. The rod integrator 10W may be a solid rod made of glass or the like.

 レンズ21Wは、白色光Wが各DMD500に照射されるように、白色光Wを略平行光化するレンズである。レンズ23は、白色光Wの拡大を抑制しながら、白色光Wを各DMD500に略結像するためのレンズである。ミラー34及びミラー35は、白色光Wを反射する。 The lens 21W is a lens that converts the white light W into a substantially parallel light so that the DMD 500 is irradiated with the white light W. The lens 23 is a lens for substantially imaging the white light W on each DMD 500 while suppressing the expansion of the white light W. The mirror 34 and the mirror 35 reflect the white light W.

 色分離合成ユニット140は、レンズ40と、プリズム50と、プリズム60と、プリズム70と、プリズム80と、プリズム90と、複数のDMD;Digital Micromirror Device(DMD500R、DMD500G及びDMD500B)とを有する。 The color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a lens 40, a prism 50, a prism 60, a prism 70, a prism 80, a prism 90, and a plurality of DMDs; Digital Micromirror Device (DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B).

 レンズ40は、各色成分光が各DMD500に照射されるように、白色光Wを略平行光化するレンズである。 The lens 40 is a lens that makes the white light W substantially parallel so that each color component light is irradiated to each DMD 500.

 プリズム50は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面51及び面52を有する。プリズム50(面51)とプリズム60(面61)との間にはエアギャップが設けられており、白色光Wが面51に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも大きいため、白色光Wは面51で反射される。一方で、プリズム50(面52)とプリズム70(面71)との間にはエアギャップが設けられるが、白色光Wが面52に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも小さいため、面51で反射された白色光Wは面52を透過する。 The prism 50 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 51 and a surface 52. An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 51) and the prism 60 (surface 61), and the angle at which the white light W is incident on the surface 51 (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle. The light W is reflected by the surface 51. On the other hand, an air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), but the angle at which the white light W enters the surface 52 (incident angle) is smaller than the total reflection angle. The white light W reflected by the surface 51 passes through the surface 52.

 プリズム60は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面61を有する。 The prism 60 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 61.

 プリズム70は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面71及び面72を有する。プリズム50(面52)とプリズム70(面71)との間にはエアギャップが設けられており、面72で反射された青成分光B及びDMD500Bから出射された青成分光Bが面71に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも大きいため、面72で反射された青成分光B及びDMD500Bから出射された青成分光Bは面71で反射される。 The prism 70 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 71 and a surface 72. An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), and the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are formed on the surface 71. Since the incident angle (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle, the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are reflected by the surface 71.

 面72は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを透過して、青成分光Bを反射するダイクロイックミラー面である。従って、面51で反射された光のうち、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gは面72を透過し、青成分光Bは面72で反射される。面71で反射された青成分光Bは面72で反射される。 The surface 72 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the red component light R and the green component light G and reflects the blue component light B. Accordingly, among the light reflected by the surface 51, the red component light R and the green component light G are transmitted through the surface 72, and the blue component light B is reflected by the surface 72. The blue component light B reflected by the surface 71 is reflected by the surface 72.

 プリズム80は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面81及び面82を有する。プリズム70(面72)とプリズム80(面81)との間にはエアギャップが設けられており、面81を透過して面82で反射された赤成分光R及びDMD500Rから出射された赤成分光Rが再び面81に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも大きいため、面81を透過して面82で反射された赤成分光R及びDMD500Rから出射された赤成分光Rは面81で反射される。一方で、DMD500Rから出射されて面81で反射された後に面82で反射された赤成分光Rが再び面81に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも小さいため、DMD500Rから出射されて面81で反射された後に面82で反射された赤成分光Rは面81を透過する。 The prism 80 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 81 and a surface 82. An air gap is provided between the prism 70 (surface 72) and the prism 80 (surface 81). The red component light R transmitted through the surface 81 and reflected by the surface 82 and the red component emitted from the DMD 500R. Since the angle (incident angle) at which the light R again enters the surface 81 is larger than the total reflection angle, the red component light R transmitted through the surface 81 and reflected by the surface 82 and the red component light R emitted from the DMD 500R are Reflected by the surface 81. On the other hand, since the angle (incident angle) at which the red component light R emitted from the DMD 500R and reflected by the surface 81 and then reflected by the surface 82 is incident on the surface 81 again is smaller than the total reflection angle, it is emitted from the DMD 500R. Then, the red component light R reflected by the surface 82 after being reflected by the surface 81 passes through the surface 81.

 面82は、緑成分光Gを透過して、赤成分光Rを反射するダイクロイックミラー面である。従って、面81を透過した光のうち、緑成分光Gは面82を透過し、赤成分光Rは面82で反射される。面81で反射された赤成分光Rは面82で反射される。DMD500Gから出射された緑成分光Gは面82を透過する。 The surface 82 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the green component light G and reflects the red component light R. Accordingly, among the light transmitted through the surface 81, the green component light G is transmitted through the surface 82, and the red component light R is reflected by the surface 82. The red component light R reflected by the surface 81 is reflected by the surface 82. The green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G passes through the surface 82.

 ここで、プリズム70は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを含む合成光と青成分光Bとを面72によって分離する。プリズム80は、赤成分光Rと緑成分光Gとを面82によって分離する。すなわち、プリズム70及びプリズム80は、各色成分光を分離する色分離素子として機能する。 Here, the prism 70 separates the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B by the surface 72. The prism 80 separates the red component light R and the green component light G by the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color separation element that separates each color component light.

 なお、第1実施形態では、プリズム70の面72のカットオフ波長は、緑色に相当する波長帯と青色に相当する波長帯との間に設けられる。プリズム80の面82のカットオフ波長は、赤色に相当する波長帯と緑色に相当する波長帯との間に設けられる。 In the first embodiment, the cutoff wavelength of the surface 72 of the prism 70 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to green and a wavelength band corresponding to blue. The cut-off wavelength of the surface 82 of the prism 80 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to red and a wavelength band corresponding to green.

 一方で、プリズム70は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを含む合成光と青成分光Bとを面72によって合成する。プリズム80は、赤成分光Rと緑成分光Gとを面82によって合成する。すなわち、プリズム70及びプリズム80は、各色成分光を合成する色合成素子として機能する。 On the other hand, the prism 70 combines the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B with the surface 72. The prism 80 combines the red component light R and the green component light G with the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color composition element that synthesizes each color component light.

 プリズム90は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面91を有する。面91は、緑成分光Gを透過するように構成されている。なお、DMD500Gへ入射する緑成分光G及びDMD500Gから出射された緑成分光Gは面91を透過する。 The prism 90 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 91. The surface 91 is configured to transmit the green component light G. The green component light G incident on the DMD 500G and the green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G pass through the surface 91.

 DMD500R、DMD500G及びDMD500Bは、複数の微少ミラーによって構成されており、複数の微少ミラーは可動式である。各微少ミラーは、基本的に1画素に相当する。DMD500Rは、各微少ミラーの角度を変更することによって、投写ユニット150側に赤成分光Rを反射するか否かを切り替える。同様に、DMD500G及びDMD500Bは、各微少ミラーの角度を変更することによって、投写ユニット150側に緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを反射するか否かを切り替える。 DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B are configured by a plurality of micromirrors, and the plurality of micromirrors are movable. Each minute mirror basically corresponds to one pixel. The DMD 500R switches whether to reflect the red component light R toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror. Similarly, the DMD 500G and the DMD 500B switch whether to reflect the green component light G and the blue component light B toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror.

 投写ユニット150は、投写レンズ群151と、凹面ミラー152とを有する。 The projection unit 150 includes a projection lens group 151 and a concave mirror 152.

 投写レンズ群151は、色分離合成ユニット140から出射された光(映像光)を凹面ミラー152側に出射する。 The projection lens group 151 emits light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 to the concave mirror 152 side.

 凹面ミラー152は、投写レンズ群151から出射された光(映像光)を反射する。凹面ミラー152は、映像光を集光した上で、映像光を広角化する。例えば、凹面ミラー152は、投写レンズ群151側に凹面を有する非球面ミラーである。 The concave mirror 152 reflects light (image light) emitted from the projection lens group 151. The concave mirror 152 condenses the image light and then widens the image light. For example, the concave mirror 152 is an aspherical mirror having a concave surface on the projection lens group 151 side.

 凹面ミラー152で集光された映像光は、天板240に設けられた天板凹部180の傾斜面181に設けられた透過領域を透過する。傾斜面181に設けられた透過領域は、凹面ミラー152によって映像光が集光される位置近傍に設けられることが好ましい。 The image light collected by the concave mirror 152 passes through a transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 of the top plate recess 180 provided on the top plate 240. The transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the position where the image light is collected by the concave mirror 152.

 凹面ミラー152は、上述したように、前面側凸部170によって形成される空間に収容される。例えば、凹面ミラー152は、前面側凸部170の内側に固定されることが好ましい。また、前面側凸部170の内側面の形状は、凹面ミラー152に沿った形状であることが好ましい。 The concave mirror 152 is accommodated in the space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 as described above. For example, the concave mirror 152 is preferably fixed inside the front side convex portion 170. In addition, the shape of the inner surface of the front side convex portion 170 is preferably a shape along the concave mirror 152.

 ここで、第1実施形態では、色分離合成ユニット140は、上述したように、拡散光学素子600(スペックルノイズ低減素子)を有する。拡散光学素子600は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光路上において、光源ユニット110とDMD500との間に設けられており、光源ユニット110から出射された光のスペックルノイズを低減するユニットである。言い換えると、拡散光学素子600は、スペックルを低減するために、白色光Wの空間コヒーレンスを低減させる光学素子である。具体的には、拡散光学素子600は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wによって均一化された白色光Wを拡散するとともに白色光Wを透過する。例えば、拡散光学素子600の構成としては、以下に示す構成が考えられる。 Here, in the first embodiment, the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes the diffusion optical element 600 (speckle noise reduction element) as described above. The diffusing optical element 600 is provided between the light source unit 110 and the DMD 500 on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110, and is a unit that reduces speckle noise of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. is there. In other words, the diffusion optical element 600 is an optical element that reduces the spatial coherence of the white light W in order to reduce speckle. Specifically, the diffusion optical element 600 diffuses the white light W made uniform by the rod integrator 10W and transmits the white light W. For example, the configuration shown below can be considered as the configuration of the diffusing optical element 600.

 (第1構成例)
 第1構成例では、図4に示すように、拡散光学素子600は、駆動装置610と、拡散板620とを有する。
(First configuration example)
In the first configuration example, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the diffusing optical element 600 includes a driving device 610 and a diffusing plate 620.

 駆動装置610は、アーム611によって拡散板620と接続されており、アーム611の駆動によって拡散板620を制御する。 The driving device 610 is connected to the diffusion plate 620 by an arm 611 and controls the diffusion plate 620 by driving the arm 611.

 拡散板620は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光路上において、光源ユニット110とDMD500との間に配置される。拡散板620は、光源ユニット110から出射される光を拡散するとともに、光源ユニット110から出射される光を透過する。 The diffusion plate 620 is disposed between the light source unit 110 and the DMD 500 on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. The diffusion plate 620 diffuses the light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits the light emitted from the light source unit 110.

 具体的には、拡散板620は、拡散度が異なる複数の領域(拡散領域621、拡散領域622、拡散領域623)を有する。第1実施形態では、拡散領域621の拡散度は、拡散領域622の拡散度よりも高く、拡散領域622の拡散度は、拡散領域623の拡散度よりも高い。 Specifically, the diffusion plate 620 includes a plurality of regions (diffusion region 621, diffusion region 622, and diffusion region 623) having different diffusivities. In the first embodiment, the diffusion degree of the diffusion region 621 is higher than that of the diffusion region 622, and the diffusion degree of the diffusion region 622 is higher than that of the diffusion region 623.

 ここで、第1構成例では、駆動装置610は、拡散領域621~拡散領域623のうち、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光が照射される領域をアーム611の駆動によって切り替える。また、駆動装置610は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光が照射される領域をアーム611の駆動によって振動させる。 Here, in the first configuration example, the driving device 610 switches the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W among the diffusion regions 621 to 623 by driving the arm 611. Further, the driving device 610 vibrates the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10 </ b> W by driving the arm 611.

 (第2構成例)
 第2構成例では、図5に示すように、拡散光学素子600は、第1構成例と同様に、駆動装置610と、拡散板620とを有する。
(Second configuration example)
In the second configuration example, as illustrated in FIG. 5, the diffusion optical element 600 includes a driving device 610 and a diffusion plate 620 as in the first configuration example.

 ここで、第2構成例では、駆動装置610は、回動体612と接続されており、回動体612を駆動する。駆動装置610は、拡散領域621~拡散領域623のうち、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光が照射される領域を回動体612の駆動によって切り替える。また、駆動装置610は、第1構成例と同様に、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光が照射される領域をアーム611の駆動によって振動させる。 Here, in the second configuration example, the driving device 610 is connected to the rotating body 612 and drives the rotating body 612. The driving device 610 switches the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W among the diffusion regions 621 to 623 by driving the rotating body 612. Similarly to the first configuration example, the driving device 610 vibrates the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10 </ b> W by driving the arm 611.

 (第3構成例)
 第3構成例では、図6に示すように、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光入射側にスペックル低減ユニット600Aが設けられており、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射側にスペックル低減ユニット600Bが設けられる。スペックル低減ユニット600A及びスペックル低減ユニット600Bの構成は、拡散光学素子600と同様である。
(Third configuration example)
In the third configuration example, as shown in FIG. 6, a speckle reduction unit 600A is provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W, and a speckle reduction unit 600B is provided on the light emission side of the rod integrator 10W. The configurations of the speckle reduction unit 600A and the speckle reduction unit 600B are the same as those of the diffusion optical element 600.

 また、スペックル低減ユニット600Aに設けられる拡散板620Aは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wに入射する光路上に配置可能に構成される。スペックル低減ユニット600Bに設けられる拡散板620Bは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光の光路上に配置可能に構成される。 Further, the diffusion plate 620A provided in the speckle reduction unit 600A is configured to be disposed on the optical path incident on the rod integrator 10W. The diffusion plate 620B provided in the speckle reduction unit 600B is configured to be disposed on the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W.

 なお、第3構成例では、拡散板620A及び拡散板620Bは、単一の拡散度を有する領域のみによって構成されてもよい。但し、拡散板620Aの拡散度は、拡散板620Bの拡散度と異なってもよい。 In the third configuration example, the diffusion plate 620A and the diffusion plate 620B may be configured only by a region having a single diffusion degree. However, the diffusion degree of the diffusion plate 620A may be different from the diffusion degree of the diffusion plate 620B.

 例えば、第3構成例では、スペックル低減ユニット600Bに設けられた駆動装置610Bは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光の光路に拡散板620Bが配置されるようにアーム611Bを駆動可能である。また、駆動装置610Bは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光の光路から拡散板620Bを外すようにアーム611Bを駆動可能である。 For example, in the third configuration example, the driving device 610B provided in the speckle reduction unit 600B can drive the arm 611B so that the diffusion plate 620B is disposed in the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. Further, the driving device 610B can drive the arm 611B so as to remove the diffusion plate 620B from the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W.

 なお、スペックル低減ユニット600Aに設けられた駆動装置610Aは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光の光路に拡散板620Aが配置されるようにアーム611Aを駆動可能であってもよい。また、駆動装置610Aは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光の光路から拡散板620Aを外すようにアーム611Aを駆動可能であってもよい。 Note that the driving device 610A provided in the speckle reduction unit 600A may be able to drive the arm 611A so that the diffusion plate 620A is disposed in the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. The driving device 610A may be capable of driving the arm 611A so as to remove the diffusion plate 620A from the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W.

 (制御ユニットの構成)
 以下において、第1実施形態に係る制御ユニットについて、図面を参照しながら説明する。図7は、第1実施形態に係る制御ユニット800を示すブロック図である。制御ユニット800は、投写型映像表示装置100に設けられており、投写型映像表示装置100を制御する。
(Configuration of control unit)
The control unit according to the first embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the control unit 800 according to the first embodiment. The control unit 800 is provided in the projection display apparatus 100 and controls the projection display apparatus 100.

 なお、制御ユニット800は、映像入力信号を映像出力信号に変換する。映像入力信号は、赤入力信号Rin、緑入力信号Gin及び青入力信号Binによって構成される。映像出力信号は、赤出力信号Rout、緑出力信号Gout及び青出力信号Boutによって構成される。映像入力信号及び映像出力信号は、1フレームを構成する複数の画素毎に入力される信号である。 The control unit 800 converts the video input signal into a video output signal. The video input signal includes a red input signal R in , a green input signal G in, and a blue input signal B in . The video output signal includes a red output signal Rout , a green output signal Gout, and a blue output signal Bout . The video input signal and the video output signal are signals input for each of a plurality of pixels constituting one frame.

 また、第1実施形態では、制御ユニット800は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の拡散度が異なる複数のモード(少なくとも第1モード及び第2モード)を制御する。ここで、拡散度が高いほど、スペックルノイズを除去する効果が高い。一方で、拡散度が高いほど、DMD500に導かれる有効光が減少するため、投写面300に表示される映像の輝度が低下する。すなわち、スペックルノイズを除去する効果及び投写面300に表示される映像の輝度は、トレードオフの関係を有する。 In the first embodiment, the control unit 800 controls a plurality of modes (at least the first mode and the second mode) having different diffusivities of light emitted from the light source unit 110. Here, the higher the diffusivity, the higher the effect of removing speckle noise. On the other hand, as the diffusivity is higher, the effective light guided to the DMD 500 is decreased, so that the luminance of the image displayed on the projection plane 300 is decreased. That is, the effect of removing speckle noise and the luminance of the image displayed on the projection plane 300 have a trade-off relationship.

 第1実施形態では、制御ユニット800は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の拡散度が異なる複数のモードの制御によって、スペックルノイズの除去を優先するか、映像の輝度を優先するかを制御する。 In the first embodiment, the control unit 800 controls whether priority is given to removal of speckle noise or video brightness by controlling a plurality of modes having different diffusion degrees of light emitted from the light source unit 110. To do.

 図7に示すように、制御ユニット800は、外部インタフェース810及びモード制御部820を有する。 As shown in FIG. 7, the control unit 800 includes an external interface 810 and a mode control unit 820.

 外部インタフェース810は、操作部910に接続されており、操作部910から操作信号を取得する。なお、操作部910は、投写型映像表示装置100(筐体200)に設けられていてもよく、リモートコントローラに設けられていてもよい。 The external interface 810 is connected to the operation unit 910 and acquires an operation signal from the operation unit 910. Note that the operation unit 910 may be provided in the projection display apparatus 100 (housing 200), or may be provided in a remote controller.

 ここで、操作信号は、例えば、図8に示すように、映像の輝度を優先するレベルを示す信号である。図8では、3つのレベルが例示されており、レベル1が選択された場合に、映像の輝度が最も優先される。すなわち、レベル1が選択された場合に、光源ユニット110から出射される光の拡散度が最も低くなるようにモードが選択される。一方で、レベル3が選択された場合に、スペックルノイズの除去が最も優先される。すなわち、レベル3が選択された場合に、光源ユニット110から出射される光の拡散度が最も高くなるようにモードが選択される。 Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 8, the operation signal is a signal indicating a level giving priority to the luminance of the video. In FIG. 8, three levels are illustrated, and when level 1 is selected, the luminance of the video is given the highest priority. That is, when level 1 is selected, the mode is selected so that the diffusion degree of the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is the lowest. On the other hand, when level 3 is selected, removal of speckle noise has the highest priority. That is, when level 3 is selected, the mode is selected so that the diffusion degree of the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is the highest.

 或いは、操作信号は、例えば、図9に示すように、投写面300(スクリーン)と視聴者との間の距離を示す信号である。ここで、投写面300(スクリーン)と視聴者との間の距離が大きいほど、スペックルノイズが観測されにくい。従って、投写面300(スクリーン)と視聴者との間の距離が大きいほど、光源ユニット110から出射される光の拡散度が低いモードが選択される。 Alternatively, the operation signal is a signal indicating the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer, for example, as shown in FIG. Here, the greater the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer, the less speckle noise is observed. Therefore, the mode in which the diffusion degree of the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is lower is selected as the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer is larger.

 外部インタフェース810は、撮像装置920A及び撮像装置920Bに接続されており、撮像装置920A及び撮像装置920Bから撮像画像を取得する。ここで、撮像装置920A及び撮像装置920Bは、図10に示すように、投写型映像表示装置100(筐体200)に設けられており、投写型映像表示装置100に対して投写面300の反対側を撮像する。すなわち、撮像装置920A及び撮像装置920Bは、視聴者を撮像する。 The external interface 810 is connected to the imaging device 920A and the imaging device 920B, and acquires a captured image from the imaging device 920A and the imaging device 920B. Here, as shown in FIG. 10, the imaging device 920 </ b> A and the imaging device 920 </ b> B are provided in the projection display apparatus 100 (housing 200), and are opposite to the projection plane 300 with respect to the projection display apparatus 100. Image the side. That is, the imaging device 920A and the imaging device 920B capture an image of the viewer.

 なお、撮像装置920A及び撮像装置920Bから取得される撮像画像によって、投写面300(スクリーン)と視聴者との間の距離が特定可能である。 Note that the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer can be specified by the captured images acquired from the imaging device 920A and the imaging device 920B.

 モード制御部820は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の拡散度が異なる複数のモードを制御する。詳細には、第1に、モード制御部820は、外部インタフェース810によって取得される情報に基づいて、複数のモードの中からモードを選択する。 The mode control unit 820 controls a plurality of modes with different degrees of diffusion of light emitted from the light source unit 110. Specifically, first, the mode control unit 820 selects a mode from a plurality of modes based on information acquired by the external interface 810.

  例えば、映像の輝度を優先するレベルを示す操作信号が外部インタフェース810によって取得される場合に、モード制御部820は、輝度を優先するレベルに基づいて、複数のモードの中からいずれのモードを選択する。或いは、投写面300(スクリーン)と視聴者との間の距離を示す操作信号が外部インタフェース810によって取得される場合には、モード制御部820は、投写面300(スクリーン)と視聴者との間の距離に基づいて、複数のモードの中からいずれのモードを選択する。或いは、撮像画像が外部インタフェース810によって取得される場合には、モード制御部820は、投写面300(スクリーン)と視聴者との間の距離を特定し、投写面300(スクリーン)と視聴者との間の距離に基づいて、複数のモードの中からいずれのモードを選択する。 For example, when an operation signal indicating a level giving priority to video luminance is acquired by the external interface 810, the mode control unit 820 selects any mode from a plurality of modes based on the level giving priority to luminance. To do. Alternatively, when the operation signal indicating the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer is acquired by the external interface 810, the mode control unit 820 displays the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer. Any mode is selected from a plurality of modes based on the distance. Alternatively, when the captured image is acquired by the external interface 810, the mode control unit 820 specifies the distance between the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer, and the projection plane 300 (screen) and the viewer. Any mode is selected from a plurality of modes based on the distance between the two modes.

 第2に、モード制御部820は、選択されたモードに基づいて、拡散光学素子600に設けられた駆動装置610を制御する。 Second, the mode control unit 820 controls the driving device 610 provided in the diffusing optical element 600 based on the selected mode.

 例えば、複数のモードが3種類であり、拡散光学素子600が図4に示す第1構成例である場合には、モード制御部820は、選択されたモードに基づいて、拡散領域621~拡散領域623のうち、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光が照射される領域を切り替えるように駆動装置610(アーム611)を制御する。例えば、スペックルノイズ除去が最も優先されるモードが選択された場合に、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光が拡散領域621に照射されるように駆動装置610(アーム611)を制御する。一方で、映像の輝度が最も優先されるモードが選択された場合に、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光が拡散領域623に照射されるように駆動装置610(アーム611)を制御する。 For example, when there are three types of a plurality of modes and the diffusing optical element 600 is the first configuration example shown in FIG. 4, the mode control unit 820 selects the diffusion region 621 to the diffusion region based on the selected mode. The drive device 610 (arm 611) is controlled so as to switch the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. For example, the drive device 610 (arm 611) is controlled so that the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W is irradiated onto the diffusion region 621 when the mode in which speckle noise removal is given the highest priority is selected. On the other hand, the drive device 610 (arm 611) is controlled so that the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W is irradiated onto the diffusion region 623 when the mode in which the luminance of the video image has the highest priority is selected.

 同様に、複数のモードが3種類であり、拡散光学素子600が図5に示す第2構成例である場合には、モード制御部820は、選択されたモードに基づいて、拡散領域621~拡散領域623のうち、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光が照射される領域を切り替えるように駆動装置610(回動体612)を制御する。 Similarly, when there are three types of the plurality of modes and the diffusing optical element 600 is the second configuration example shown in FIG. 5, the mode control unit 820 performs diffusion regions 621 to diffusing based on the selected mode. The drive device 610 (rotating body 612) is controlled so as to switch the region irradiated with the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W in the region 623.

 或いは、複数のモードが2種類であり、拡散光学素子600が図6に示す第3成例である場合には、モード制御部820は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光を透過する拡散光学素子の枚数を制御する。具体的には、スペックルノイズ除去が優先されるモードが選択された場合に、モード制御部820は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光から拡散板620Bを外れるように駆動装置610(アーム611B)を制御する。一方で、映像の輝度が優先されるモードが選択された場合に、モード制御部820は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光の光路上に拡散板620Bが配置されるように駆動装置610(アーム611B)を制御する。 Alternatively, when there are two types of the plurality of modes and the diffusion optical element 600 is the third example shown in FIG. 6, the mode control unit 820 transmits the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. Control the number of sheets. Specifically, when a mode in which speckle noise removal is prioritized is selected, the mode control unit 820 drives the drive device 610 (arm 611B) so as to remove the diffuser plate 620B from the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. To control. On the other hand, when the mode in which the luminance of the image is prioritized is selected, the mode control unit 820 causes the driving device 610 (arms) so that the diffusion plate 620B is disposed on the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W. 611B).

 第3に、モード制御部820は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光の光路上に配置された拡散板(拡散領域)を所定動作パターンで動作するように駆動装置610(アーム611)を制御する。 Third, the mode control unit 820 controls the driving device 610 (arm 611) so that the diffusion plate (diffusion region) disposed on the optical path of the light emitted from the rod integrator 10W operates in a predetermined operation pattern. .

 (作用及び効果)
 第1実施形態では、制御ユニット800は、第1モード(例えば、スペックルノイズの除去が優先されるモード)において、第2モード(例えば、映像の輝度が優先されるモード)よりも高い拡散度で、光源ユニット110から出射される光を拡散するように拡散光学素子600を制御する。すなわち、第1モードでは、第2モードと比べて、拡散度が高いため、スペックルノイズが効果的に除去される。一方で、第2モードでは、第1モードと比べて、拡散度が低いため、輝度低下が抑制される。すなわち、モードの切り替えによって、スペックルノイズの除去及び輝度低下抑制を適切に両立することができる。
(Action and effect)
In the first embodiment, the control unit 800 has a higher diffusivity in the first mode (for example, a mode in which speckle noise removal is prioritized) than in the second mode (for example, a mode in which video luminance is prioritized). Thus, the diffusion optical element 600 is controlled so as to diffuse the light emitted from the light source unit 110. That is, in the first mode, speckle noise is effectively removed because the degree of diffusion is higher than in the second mode. On the other hand, in the second mode, since the diffusivity is lower than that in the first mode, a decrease in luminance is suppressed. That is, it is possible to appropriately achieve both speckle noise removal and luminance reduction suppression by switching modes.

 [変更例1]
 以下において、第1実施形態の変更例1について、図面を参照しながら説明する。以下においては、第1実施形態との相違点について主として説明する。
[Modification 1]
Hereinafter, Modification Example 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following, differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

 具体的には、変更例1では、第1実施形態と比べて、拡散光学素子600の構成が異なっている。 Specifically, in the first modification, the configuration of the diffusing optical element 600 is different from that in the first embodiment.

 (拡散光学素子の構成)
 以下において、変更例1に係る拡散光学素子の構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図11及び図12は、変更例1に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。
(Configuration of diffusion optical element)
Hereinafter, the configuration of the diffusing optical element according to the modification example 1 will be described with reference to the drawings. 11 and 12 are diagrams showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the first modification.

 図11及び図12に示すように、拡散光学素子600は、一対の回転体(回転体651及び回転体652)と、回転体651及び回転体652に無端ループ状に巻き掛けられた帯状の拡散シート653とを有する。 As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the diffusing optical element 600 includes a pair of rotating bodies (rotating body 651 and rotating body 652), and a belt-like diffusion wound around the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 in an endless loop shape. A sheet 653.

 回転体651は、回転軸S1を中心に回転可能である。回転体652は、回転軸S1と略平行な回転軸S2を中心に回転可能である。回転軸S1又は回転軸S2の何れかには、駆動装置(不図示)が接続される。例えば、駆動装置はモータであり、モータは、回転軸S1を回転させる。ここで、回転体651が回転すると、帯状の拡散シート653を介して回転体651の回転力が回転体652に伝達される。これによって、回転体652も回転する。すなわち、2つのモータを使用せずに、1つのモータの駆動によって、回転体651及び回転体652の双方を回転させることができる。 The rotating body 651 can rotate around the rotation axis S1. The rotating body 652 can rotate around a rotation axis S2 substantially parallel to the rotation axis S1. A driving device (not shown) is connected to either the rotating shaft S1 or the rotating shaft S2. For example, the driving device is a motor, and the motor rotates the rotation shaft S1. Here, when the rotating body 651 rotates, the rotational force of the rotating body 651 is transmitted to the rotating body 652 through the belt-shaped diffusion sheet 653. As a result, the rotating body 652 also rotates. That is, both the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 can be rotated by driving one motor without using two motors.

 回転体651及び回転体652のそれぞれは、円柱状であり、互いに略等しい形状を有する。回転体651と回転体652との間には、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射面から出射される光束の径と同程度の間隔が設けられている。 Each of the rotator 651 and the rotator 652 has a columnar shape and has substantially the same shape. Between the rotator 651 and the rotator 652, an interval is provided which is approximately the same as the diameter of the light beam emitted from the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10 </ b> W.

 帯状の拡散シート653は、光透過性の部材により形成されている。帯状の拡散シート653には、微少な凹凸が刻まれている。帯状の拡散シート653は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される白色光Wを拡散するとともに白色光Wを透過する。帯状の拡散シート653は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光束の径と同程度の幅を有している。 The strip-shaped diffusion sheet 653 is formed of a light transmissive member. The band-shaped diffusion sheet 653 is engraved with minute irregularities. The strip-shaped diffusion sheet 653 diffuses the white light W emitted from the rod integrator 10 </ b> W and transmits the white light W. The strip-shaped diffusion sheet 653 has a width approximately equal to the diameter of the light beam emitted from the rod integrator 10W.

 帯状の拡散シート653は、白色光Wの進行方向に離間して配置された拡散面F1及び拡散面F2を構成する。拡散面F1及び拡散面F2のそれぞれの大きさは光束の径と同程度である。拡散面F1及び拡散面F2のそれぞれは、回転体651及び回転体652の回転に伴って連続的に移動する。拡散面F1の移動方向は、拡散面F2の移動方向とは逆方向である。 The strip-shaped diffusion sheet 653 constitutes a diffusion surface F1 and a diffusion surface F2 that are spaced apart in the traveling direction of the white light W. The size of each of the diffusing surface F1 and the diffusing surface F2 is approximately the same as the diameter of the light beam. Each of the diffusing surface F1 and the diffusing surface F2 continuously moves as the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 rotate. The moving direction of the diffusing surface F1 is opposite to the moving direction of the diffusing surface F2.

 変更例1では、拡散面F1は、所定の方向に連続的に移動する第1の拡散面である。拡散面F2は、所定の方向(拡散面F1の移動方向)とは反対の方向に連続的に移動する第2の拡散面である。 In the first modification, the diffusion surface F1 is a first diffusion surface that continuously moves in a predetermined direction. The diffusion surface F2 is a second diffusion surface that continuously moves in a direction opposite to a predetermined direction (movement direction of the diffusion surface F1).

 ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される白色光Wは、まず拡散面F1を透過し、次いで拡散面F2を透過する。白色光Wが拡散面F1を透過する際、拡散面F1によって白色光Wが拡散される。白色光Wが拡散面F2を透過する際、拡散面F2によって白色光Wが拡散される。 The white light W emitted from the rod integrator 10W first passes through the diffusion surface F1, and then passes through the diffusion surface F2. When the white light W passes through the diffusion surface F1, the white light W is diffused by the diffusion surface F1. When the white light W passes through the diffusion surface F2, the white light W is diffused by the diffusion surface F2.

 なお、回転軸S1及び回転軸S2の向きは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光軸に対して略垂直であればよい。すなわち、拡散面F1及び拡散面F2は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光軸に対して略垂直であればよい。 In addition, the direction of the rotation axis S1 and the rotation axis S2 may be substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the rod integrator 10W. That is, the diffusing surface F1 and the diffusing surface F2 may be substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the rod integrator 10W.

 例えば、図12(a)に示すように、拡散光学素子600は、回転軸S1及び回転軸S2の向きが投写型映像表示装置100の高さ方向となるように配置されてもよい。図12(a)に示すケースでは、拡散面F1及び拡散面F2は、投写型映像表示装置100の高さ方向に沿って移動する。 For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the diffusing optical element 600 may be arranged such that the orientations of the rotation axis S1 and the rotation axis S2 are in the height direction of the projection display apparatus 100. In the case shown in FIG. 12A, the diffusion surface F <b> 1 and the diffusion surface F <b> 2 move along the height direction of the projection display apparatus 100.

 或いは、図12(b)に示すように、拡散光学素子600は、回転軸S1及び回転軸S2の向きが投写型映像表示装置100の幅方向となるように配置されてもよい。図12(a)に示すケースでは、拡散面F1及び拡散面F2は、投写型映像表示装置100の幅方向に沿って移動する。 Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 12B, the diffusing optical element 600 may be arranged so that the directions of the rotation axis S <b> 1 and the rotation axis S <b> 2 are the width direction of the projection display apparatus 100. In the case shown in FIG. 12A, the diffusion surface F <b> 1 and the diffusion surface F <b> 2 move along the width direction of the projection display apparatus 100.

 (作用及び効果)
 変更例1では、白色光Wが拡散面F1及び拡散面F2によって拡散し、拡散面F1及び拡散面F2が連続的に移動する。言い換えると、拡散面F1及び拡散面F2が静止せずに、拡散面F1及び拡散面F2が常に移動する。従って、スペックルノイズの低減効果を常に維持することができる。
(Action and effect)
In the first modification, the white light W is diffused by the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2, and the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2 move continuously. In other words, the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2 always move without the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2 being stationary. Therefore, the effect of reducing speckle noise can always be maintained.

 変更例1では、回転体651及び回転体652に無端ループ状に巻き掛けられた帯状の拡散シート653によって拡散面F1及び拡散面F2が構成される。従って、拡散光学素子600のサイズをロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される光束のサイズと同程度とすることができる。従って、拡散光学素子600の小型化が可能であり、投写型映像表示装置100の小型化を図ることがきる。 In the first modification, the diffusion surface F1 and the diffusion surface F2 are configured by the belt-like diffusion sheet 653 wound around the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 in an endless loop shape. Therefore, the size of the diffusing optical element 600 can be made approximately the same as the size of the light beam emitted from the rod integrator 10W. Therefore, the diffusing optical element 600 can be reduced in size, and the projection display apparatus 100 can be reduced in size.

 変更例1では、1つのモータによって回転体651及び回転体652を回転するため、省電力化を図ることができる。 In the first modification, the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 are rotated by one motor, so that power saving can be achieved.

 変更例1では、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射側に拡散光学素子600が設けられる。従って、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光入射側に拡散光学素子600が設けられるケースと比べて、光利用効率の低下を抑制することができる。詳細には、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光入射側に拡散光学素子600が設けられるケースでは、拡散光学素子600によって拡散される光束の一部がロッドインテグレータ10Wに入射しない可能性がある。 In the first modification, the diffusion optical element 600 is provided on the light exit side of the rod integrator 10W. Therefore, compared with the case where the diffusion optical element 600 is provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W, a decrease in light utilization efficiency can be suppressed. Specifically, in the case where the diffusion optical element 600 is provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W, a part of the light beam diffused by the diffusion optical element 600 may not enter the rod integrator 10W.

 但し、図13に示すように、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光入射側に拡散光学素子600が設けられてもよい。このようなケースでは、回転体651及び回転体652に無端ループ状に巻き掛けられた帯状の拡散シート653によって拡散面F1及び拡散面F2のサイズは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光入射面よりも小さいことが好ましい。 However, as shown in FIG. 13, a diffusion optical element 600 may be provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W. In such a case, the size of the diffusing surface F1 and the diffusing surface F2 is smaller than the light incident surface of the rod integrator 10W by the strip-shaped diffusing sheet 653 wound around the rotating body 651 and the rotating body 652 in an endless loop shape. Is preferred.

 従って、図13に示すケースでは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射側に拡散光学素子600が設けられるケースと比べて、拡散光学素子600の小型化が可能である。 Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 13, the diffusing optical element 600 can be made smaller than the case where the diffusing optical element 600 is provided on the light exit side of the rod integrator 10W.

 [変更例2]
 以下において、第1実施形態の変更例2について、図面を参照しながら説明する。以下においては、第1実施形態との相違点について主として説明する。
[Modification 2]
Hereinafter, Modification Example 2 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following, differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

 具体的には、変更例2では、第1実施形態と比べて、拡散光学素子600の構成が異なっている。 Specifically, in the second modification, the configuration of the diffusing optical element 600 is different from that in the first embodiment.

 (拡散光学素子の構成)
 以下において、変更例1に係る拡散光学素子の構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図14は、変更例2に係る拡散光学素子600を示す図である。
(Configuration of diffusion optical element)
Hereinafter, the configuration of the diffusing optical element according to the modification example 1 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a diffusing optical element 600 according to the second modification.

 図14に示すように、拡散光学素子600は、複数の拡散板(拡散板661及び拡散板662)によって構成される。拡散板661及び拡散板662は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射側に配置される。 As shown in FIG. 14, the diffusing optical element 600 includes a plurality of diffusing plates (a diffusing plate 661 and a diffusing plate 662). The diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 are disposed on the light exit side of the rod integrator 10W.

 変更例1において、拡散板661は、所定の方向に沿って振動する第1の拡散板である。拡散板662は、拡散板661とは異なる方向に振動する。すなわち、制御ユニット800は、拡散板661及び拡散板662が異なる方向に沿って振動するように拡散光学素子600を制御する。 In the first modification, the diffusion plate 661 is a first diffusion plate that vibrates along a predetermined direction. The diffusion plate 662 vibrates in a direction different from that of the diffusion plate 661. That is, the control unit 800 controls the diffusion optical element 600 so that the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 vibrate along different directions.

 拡散板661及び拡散板662は、光透過性の部材により形成され、微少な凹凸が刻まれている。拡散板661及び拡散板662は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wから出射される白色光Wを拡散するとともに白色光Wを透過する。 The diffusing plate 661 and the diffusing plate 662 are formed of a light-transmitting member and have minute unevenness. The diffusing plate 661 and the diffusing plate 662 diffuse the white light W emitted from the rod integrator 10 </ b> W and transmit the white light W.

 ここで、制御ユニット800は、拡散板661及び拡散板662のうち、一方の拡散板が止まるときに、他の拡散板が動くように拡散光学素子600を制御する。 Here, the control unit 800 controls the diffusion optical element 600 so that when one of the diffusion plates 661 and 662 stops, the other diffusion plate moves.

 例えば、拡散板661(拡散面F1)の振動位相をφとし、拡散板662(拡散面F2)の振動位相をφ’とした場合に、制御ユニット800は、φ’≠φ+nπの関係が満たされるように、拡散光学素子600を制御する。 For example, when the vibration phase of the diffusion plate 661 (diffusion surface F1) is φ and the vibration phase of the diffusion plate 662 (diffusion surface F2) is φ ′, the control unit 800 satisfies the relationship of φ ′ ≠ φ + nπ. Thus, the diffusion optical element 600 is controlled.

 なお、拡散板661及び拡散板662の縦横のサイズは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射面(光出射面から出射される光束のサイズ)と同程度以上であればよい。図14では、拡散板661及び拡散板662の縦横のサイズがレンズ21Wのサイズと同程度であるケースについて例示している。 It should be noted that the vertical and horizontal sizes of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be equal to or larger than the light output surface (the size of the light beam emitted from the light output surface) of the rod integrator 10W. FIG. 14 illustrates a case where the vertical and horizontal sizes of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 are approximately the same as the size of the lens 21W.

 なお、図15(a)及び図15(b)に示すように、拡散板661及び拡散板662の振動方向は同じであってもよい。例えば、拡散板661及び拡散板662の振動方向は、図15(a)に示すように、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光軸wに対して垂直な方向(D1方向)であってもよい。或いは、拡散板661及び拡散板662の振動方向は、図15(b)に示すように、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光軸wと同じ方向(D2方向)であってもよい。 Note that, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the vibration directions of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be the same. For example, the vibration directions of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be a direction (D1 direction) perpendicular to the optical axis w of the rod integrator 10W, as shown in FIG. Alternatively, the vibration directions of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be the same direction (D2 direction) as the optical axis w of the rod integrator 10W, as shown in FIG.

 また、図16(a)及び図16(b)に示すように、拡散板661及び拡散板662の振動方向は異なっていてもよい。例えば、図16(a)に示すように、拡散板661の振動方向がD3方向であり、拡散板662の振動方向がD1方向であってもよい。或いは、図16(b)に示すように、拡散板661の振動方向がD1方向であり、拡散板662の振動方向がD2方向であってもよい。 Further, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the vibration directions of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, the vibration direction of the diffusion plate 661 may be the D3 direction, and the vibration direction of the diffusion plate 662 may be the D1 direction. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 16B, the vibration direction of the diffusion plate 661 may be the D1 direction, and the vibration direction of the diffusion plate 662 may be the D2 direction.

 (作用及び効果)
 変更例2では、白色光Wが拡散板661(拡散面F1)及び拡散板662(拡散面F2)によって拡散し、拡散板661(拡散面F1)及び拡散板662(拡散面F2)のうち、少なくともいずれか一方が常に移動する。従って、スペックルノイズの低減効果を常に維持することができる。
(Action and effect)
In the modified example 2, the white light W is diffused by the diffusion plate 661 (diffusion surface F1) and the diffusion plate 662 (diffusion surface F2), and among the diffusion plate 661 (diffusion surface F1) and the diffusion plate 662 (diffusion surface F2), At least one of them always moves. Therefore, the effect of reducing speckle noise can always be maintained.

 [変更例3]
 以下において、第1実施形態の変更例3について、図面を参照しながら説明する。以下においては、第2変更例との相違点について主として説明する。具体的には、変更例3では、拡散板661及び拡散板662の配置が異なっている。
[Modification 3]
Hereinafter, Modification Example 3 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following, differences from the second modification will be mainly described. Specifically, in the third modification, the arrangement of the diffusion plate 661 and the diffusion plate 662 is different.

 例えば、図17に示すように、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光入射側に拡散板661及び拡散板662が配置されてもよい。或いは、図18に示すように、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光入射側に拡散板661が配置され、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射側に拡散板662が配置されてもよい。 For example, as shown in FIG. 17, a diffusion plate 661 and a diffusion plate 662 may be disposed on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W. Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 18, the diffusion plate 661 may be disposed on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10 </ b> W, and the diffusion plate 662 may be disposed on the light emission side of the rod integrator 10 </ b> W.

 [第2実施形態の概要]
 (第2実施形態の課題)
 投写型映像表示装置は、リレー光学系及び投写ユニットを有しており、リレー光学系の絞り及び投写ユニットの絞り(射出瞳)は、共役の関係を有する。
[Outline of Second Embodiment]
(Problem of the second embodiment)
The projection display apparatus has a relay optical system and a projection unit, and the aperture of the relay optical system and the aperture (exit pupil) of the projection unit have a conjugate relationship.

 ここで、リレー光学系の絞り面及び投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)において、光強度の空間分布は、レーザ光源から出射された光の角度分布を反映したガウス状の分布となる。 Here, on the aperture plane of the relay optical system and the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit, the spatial distribution of the light intensity is a Gaussian distribution reflecting the angular distribution of the light emitted from the laser light source.

 従って、投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)から投写面の1点(例えば、投写面の中心点)に至る光束を考えると、投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)の周辺領域から投写面の1点に至る光の強度は、投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)の中心領域から投写面の1点に至る光の強度よりも小さい。 Therefore, considering the light flux from the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit to one point on the projection plane (for example, the center point of the projection plane), the projection plane starts from the peripheral area of the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit. The intensity of light reaching one point is smaller than the intensity of light reaching one point on the projection plane from the central area of the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit.

 このように、投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)から投写面の1点に至る光の強度が均一な角度分布とならないため、角度重畳によるスペックルノイズ低減効果が十分に発揮されずに、スペックルノイズが観測されてしまう。 In this way, since the intensity of light from the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit to one point on the projection plane does not have a uniform angular distribution, the speckle noise reduction effect due to angle superposition is not fully exhibited, Speckle noise is observed.

 (第2実施形態の構成)
 第2実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置は、可干渉性を有する光を出射する光源と、光源から出射された光を変調する光変調素子と、光変調素子から出射された光を投写面に投写する投写ユニットと、光源から出射された光が光変調素子に照射されるように光源から出射された光を中継するリレー光学系とを備える。投写型映像表示装置は、投写ユニットの射出瞳面における光強度の空間分布を均一化する均一化光学素子を備える。
(Configuration of Second Embodiment)
A projection display apparatus according to the second embodiment includes a light source that emits coherent light, a light modulation element that modulates light emitted from the light source, and a projection surface that emits light emitted from the light modulation element. And a relay optical system that relays the light emitted from the light source so that the light emitted from the light source is irradiated onto the light modulation element. The projection display apparatus includes a uniformizing optical element that uniformizes the spatial distribution of light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit.

 第2実施形態では、均一化光学素子は、投写ユニットの射出瞳面における光強度の空間分布を均一化する。従って、投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)から投写面の1点に至る光の強度が均一な角度分布となるため、角度重畳によるスペックルノイズ低減効果が十分に発揮され、スペックルノイズを効果的に除去することができる。 In the second embodiment, the uniformizing optical element uniformizes the spatial distribution of light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit. Accordingly, since the intensity of light from the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit to one point on the projection plane has a uniform angular distribution, the speckle noise reduction effect due to angle superposition is sufficiently exerted, and speckle noise is reduced. It can be effectively removed.

 [第2実施形態]
 (投写型映像表示装置の構成)
 以下において、第2実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置の構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図19は、第2実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を示す斜視図である。図20は、第2実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を側方から見た図である。
[Second Embodiment]
(Configuration of projection display device)
Hereinafter, the configuration of the projection display apparatus according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing a projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 20 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment.

 図19及び図20に示すように、投写型映像表示装置100は、筐体200を有しており、投写面300に映像を投写する。以下においては、投写型映像表示装置100が壁面に設けられた投写面300に映像光を投写するケースについて例示する(壁面投写)。 As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the projection display apparatus 100 has a casing 200 and projects an image on the projection plane 300. In the following, a case where the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto the projection plane 300 provided on the wall surface will be exemplified (wall surface projection).

 このようなケースにおける筐体200の配置を壁面投写配置と称する。具体的には、投写型映像表示装置100は、壁面420と、壁面420に略垂直な床面410とに沿って配置される。 The arrangement of the casing 200 in such a case is referred to as a wall surface projection arrangement. Specifically, the projection display apparatus 100 is disposed along a wall surface 420 and a floor surface 410 that is substantially perpendicular to the wall surface 420.

 第2実施形態では、投写面300に平行な水平方向を“幅方向”と称する。投写面300の法線方向を“奥行き方向”と称する。幅方向及び奥行き方向の双方に直交する方向を“高さ方向”と称する。 In the second embodiment, a horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “width direction”. The normal direction of the projection plane 300 is referred to as “depth direction”. A direction orthogonal to both the width direction and the depth direction is referred to as a “height direction”.

 筐体200は、略直方体形状を有する。奥行き方向における筐体200のサイズ及び高さ方向における筐体200のサイズは、幅方向における筐体200のサイズよりも小さい。奥行き方向における筐体200のサイズは、反射ミラー(図20に示す凹面ミラー152)から投写面300までの投写距離と略等しい。幅方向において、筐体200のサイズは、投写面300のサイズと略等しい。高さ方向において、筐体200のサイズは、投写面300が設けられる位置に応じて定められる。 The housing 200 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The size of the housing 200 in the depth direction and the size of the housing 200 in the height direction are smaller than the size of the housing 200 in the width direction. The size of the casing 200 in the depth direction is substantially equal to the projection distance from the reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 20) to the projection plane 300. In the width direction, the size of the casing 200 is substantially equal to the size of the projection plane 300. In the height direction, the size of the housing 200 is determined according to the position where the projection plane 300 is provided.

 具体的には、筐体200は、投写面側側壁210と、前面側側壁220と、底面板230と、天板240と、第1側面側側壁250と、第2側面側側壁260とを有する。 Specifically, the housing 200 includes a projection surface side wall 210, a front surface side wall 220, a bottom plate 230, a top plate 240, a first side surface side wall 250, and a second side surface side wall 260. .

 投写面側側壁210は、投写面300と略平行な第1配置面(第2実施形態では、壁面420)と対向する板状の部材である。前面側側壁220は、投写面側側壁210の反対側に設けられた板状の部材である。底面板230は、床面410と対向する板状の部材である。天板240は、底面板230の反対側に設けられた板状の部材である。第1側面側側壁250及び第2側面側側壁260は、幅方向において筐体200の両端を形成する板状の部材である。 The projection surface side wall 210 is a plate-like member that faces a first arrangement surface (in the second embodiment, a wall surface 420) substantially parallel to the projection surface 300. The front side wall 220 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the projection plane side wall 210. The bottom plate 230 is a plate-like member that faces the floor surface 410. The top plate 240 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the bottom plate 230. The first side wall 250 and the second side wall 260 are plate-like members that form both ends of the housing 200 in the width direction.

 筐体200は、光源ユニット110と、電源ユニット120と、冷却ユニット130と、色分離合成ユニット140と、投写ユニット150とを収容する。投写面側側壁210は、投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bを有する。前面側側壁220は、前面側凸部170を有する。天板240は、天板凹部180を有する。第1側面側側壁250は、ケーブル端子190を有する。 The housing 200 accommodates the light source unit 110, the power supply unit 120, the cooling unit 130, the color separation / combination unit 140, and the projection unit 150. The projection surface side sidewall 210 has a projection surface side recess 160A and a projection surface side recess 160B. The front side wall 220 has a front side convex portion 170. The top plate 240 has a top plate recess 180. The first side wall 250 has a cable terminal 190.

 光源ユニット110は、複数の光源(図21に示す固体光源111W)によって構成されるユニットである。各光源は、LD(Laser Diode)などの半導体レーザ素子である。第2実施形態では、複数の固体光源111Wは、可干渉性を有する白色光Wを出射する。光源ユニット110の詳細については後述する。 The light source unit 110 is a unit composed of a plurality of light sources (solid light source 111W shown in FIG. 21). Each light source is a semiconductor laser element such as an LD (Laser Diode). In the second embodiment, the plurality of solid light sources 111W emit white light W having coherence. Details of the light source unit 110 will be described later.

 電源ユニット120は、投写型映像表示装置100に電力を供給するユニットである。例えば、電源ユニット120は、光源ユニット110及び冷却ユニット130に電力を供給する。 The power supply unit 120 is a unit that supplies power to the projection display apparatus 100. For example, the power supply unit 120 supplies power to the light source unit 110 and the cooling unit 130.

 冷却ユニット130は、光源ユニット110に設けられた複数の光源を冷却するユニットである。具体的には、冷却ユニット130は、各光源を載置する冷却ジャケットを冷却することによって、各光源を冷却する。 The cooling unit 130 is a unit that cools a plurality of light sources provided in the light source unit 110. Specifically, the cooling unit 130 cools each light source by cooling a cooling jacket on which each light source is placed.

 なお、冷却ユニット130は、各光源以外にも、電源ユニット120や光変調素子(後述するDMD500)を冷却するように構成されている。 The cooling unit 130 is configured to cool the power supply unit 120 and the light modulation element (DMD 500 described later) in addition to each light source.

 色分離合成ユニット140は、白色光Wを分離して、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを分離する。さらに、色分離合成ユニット140は、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを再合成して、映像光を投写ユニット150に出射する。色分離合成ユニット140の詳細については後述する(図21を参照)。 Color separation / combination unit 140 separates white light W and separates red component light R, green component light G, and blue component light B. Further, the color separation / combination unit 140 recombines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and emits image light to the projection unit 150. Details of the color separation / synthesis unit 140 will be described later (see FIG. 21).

 投写ユニット150は、色分離合成ユニット140から出射された光(映像光)を投写面300に投写する。具体的には、投写ユニット150は、色分離合成ユニット140から出射された光を投写面300上に投写する投写レンズ群(図21に示す投写レンズ群151)と、投写レンズ群から出射された光を投写面300側に反射する反射ミラー(図21に示す凹面ミラー152)とを有する。投写ユニット150の詳細については後述する。 The projection unit 150 projects the light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300. Specifically, the projection unit 150 projects the light emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300 (projection lens group 151 shown in FIG. 21) and the projection lens group. A reflecting mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 21) that reflects light toward the projection plane 300; Details of the projection unit 150 will be described later.

 投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bは、投写面側側壁210に設けられており、筐体200の内側に窪む形状を有する。投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bは、筐体200の端まで延びている。投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bには、筐体200の内側に連通する通気口が設けられる。 The projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B are provided on the projection surface side wall 210 and have a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200. The projection surface side recess 160 </ b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 </ b> B extend to the end of the housing 200. The projection surface side recess 160 </ b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 </ b> B are provided with vent holes that communicate with the inside of the housing 200.

 第2実施形態では、投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bは、筐体200の幅方向に沿って延びている。例えば、投写面側凹部160Aには、筐体200の外側の空気を筐体200の内側に入れるための吸気口が通気口として設けられる。投写面側凹部160Bには、筐体200の内側の空気を筐体200の外側に出すための排気口が通気口として設けられる。 In the second embodiment, the projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B extend along the width direction of the housing 200. For example, the projection surface side recess 160 </ b> A is provided with an air inlet for allowing air outside the housing 200 to enter the housing 200 as a vent. The projection surface side recess 160 </ b> B is provided with an exhaust port for venting air inside the housing 200 to the outside of the housing 200 as a vent.

 前面側凸部170は、前面側側壁220に設けられており、筐体200の外側に張り出す形状を有する。前面側凸部170は、筐体200の幅方向において、前面側側壁220の略中央に設けられる。筐体200の内側において前面側凸部170によって形成される空間には、投写ユニット150に設けられた反射ミラー(図21に示す凹面ミラー152)が収容される。 The front side convex portion 170 is provided on the front side wall 220 and has a shape protruding to the outside of the housing 200. The front side convex portion 170 is provided at the approximate center of the front side wall 220 in the width direction of the housing 200. A reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 21) provided in the projection unit 150 is accommodated in a space formed by the front side convex portion 170 inside the housing 200.

 天板凹部180は、天板240に設けられており、筐体200の内側に窪む形状を有する。天板凹部180は、投写面300側に向けて下る傾斜面181を有する。傾斜面181は、投写ユニット150から出射された光を投写面300側に透過(投写)する透過領域を有する。 The top plate recess 180 is provided in the top plate 240 and has a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200. The top plate recess 180 has an inclined surface 181 that goes down toward the projection plane 300 side. The inclined surface 181 has a transmission region that transmits (projects) the light emitted from the projection unit 150 to the projection surface 300 side.

 ケーブル端子190は、第1側面側側壁250に設けられており、電源端子や映像端子などの端子である。なお、ケーブル端子190は、第2側面側側壁260に設けられていてもよい。 The cable terminal 190 is provided on the first side wall 250 and is a terminal such as a power terminal or a video terminal. The cable terminal 190 may be provided on the second side wall 260.

 (光源ユニット、色分離合成ユニット及び投写ユニットの構成)
 以下において、第2実施形態に係る光源ユニット、色分離合成ユニット及び投写ユニットの構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図21は、第2実施形態に係る光源ユニット110、色分離合成ユニット140及び投写ユニット150を示す図である。第2実施形態では、DLP(Digital Light Processing)方式(登録商標)に対応する投写型映像表示装置100を例示する。
(Configuration of light source unit, color separation / synthesis unit and projection unit)
Hereinafter, configurations of the light source unit, the color separation / synthesis unit, and the projection unit according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the light source unit 110, the color separation / synthesis unit 140, and the projection unit 150 according to the second embodiment. The second embodiment exemplifies a projection display apparatus 100 that supports a DLP (Digital Light Processing) method (registered trademark).

 図21に示すように、光源ユニット110は、複数の固体光源111W、複数の光ファイバー113W及びバンドル部114Wを有する。固体光源111Wは、上述したように、可干渉性を有する白色光Wを出射するLDなどの半導体レーザ素子である。固体光源111Wには、光ファイバー113Wが接続される。 As shown in FIG. 21, the light source unit 110 includes a plurality of solid light sources 111W, a plurality of optical fibers 113W, and a bundle portion 114W. As described above, the solid-state light source 111W is a semiconductor laser element such as an LD that emits white light W having coherence. An optical fiber 113W is connected to the solid light source 111W.

 各固体光源111Wに接続された光ファイバー113Wは、バンドル部114Wで束ねられる。すなわち、各固体光源111Wから出射された光は、各光ファイバー113Wによって伝達されて、バンドル部114Wに集められる。固体光源111Wは、固体光源111Wを冷却するための冷却ジャケット(不図示)に載置される。 The optical fibers 113W connected to each solid light source 111W are bundled by a bundle portion 114W. That is, the light emitted from each solid light source 111W is transmitted by each optical fiber 113W and collected in the bundle portion 114W. The solid light source 111W is placed on a cooling jacket (not shown) for cooling the solid light source 111W.

 色分離合成ユニット140は、ロッドインテグレータ10W、レンズ21W、レンズ23、ミラー34及びミラー35を有する。また、色分離合成ユニット140は、拡散光学素子600を有する。 The color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a rod integrator 10W, a lens 21W, a lens 23, a mirror 34, and a mirror 35. The color separation / combination unit 140 includes a diffusion optical element 600.

 ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、光入射面と、光出射面と、光入射面の外周から光出射面の外周に亘って設けられる光反射側面とを有する。ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、バンドル部114Wで束ねられた光ファイバー113Wから出射される白色光Wを均一化する。すなわち、ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、光反射側面で白色光Wを反射することによって、白色光Wを均一化する。 The rod integrator 10W has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface. The rod integrator 10W makes the white light W emitted from the optical fiber 113W bundled by the bundle unit 114W uniform. That is, the rod integrator 10W makes the white light W uniform by reflecting the white light W on the light reflection side surface.

 なお、ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、光反射側面がミラー面によって構成された中空ロッドであってもよい。また、ロッドインテグレータ10Wは、ガラスなどによって構成された中実ロッドであってもよい。 The rod integrator 10W may be a hollow rod having a light reflection side surface constituted by a mirror surface. The rod integrator 10W may be a solid rod made of glass or the like.

 レンズ21Wは、白色光Wが各DMD500に照射されるように、白色光Wを略平行光化するレンズである。レンズ23は、白色光Wの拡大を抑制しながら、白色光Wを各DMD500に略結像するためのレンズである。ミラー34及びミラー35は、白色光Wを反射する。 The lens 21W is a lens that converts the white light W into a substantially parallel light so that the DMD 500 is irradiated with the white light W. The lens 23 is a lens for substantially imaging the white light W on each DMD 500 while suppressing the expansion of the white light W. The mirror 34 and the mirror 35 reflect the white light W.

 色分離合成ユニット140は、レンズ40と、プリズム50と、プリズム60と、プリズム70と、プリズム80と、プリズム90と、複数のDMD;Digital Micromirror Device(DMD500R、DMD500G及びDMD500B)とを有する。 The color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a lens 40, a prism 50, a prism 60, a prism 70, a prism 80, a prism 90, and a plurality of DMDs; Digital Micromirror Device (DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B).

 レンズ40は、各色成分光が各DMD500に照射されるように、白色光Wを略平行光化するレンズである。 The lens 40 is a lens that makes the white light W substantially parallel so that each color component light is irradiated to each DMD 500.

 プリズム50は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面51及び面52を有する。プリズム50(面51)とプリズム60(面61)との間にはエアギャップが設けられており、白色光Wが面51に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも大きいため、白色光Wは面51で反射される。一方で、プリズム50(面52)とプリズム70(面71)との間にはエアギャップが設けられるが、白色光Wが面52に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも小さいため、面51で反射された白色光Wは面52を透過する。 The prism 50 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 51 and a surface 52. An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 51) and the prism 60 (surface 61), and the angle at which the white light W is incident on the surface 51 (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle. The light W is reflected by the surface 51. On the other hand, an air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), but the angle at which the white light W enters the surface 52 (incident angle) is smaller than the total reflection angle. The white light W reflected by the surface 51 passes through the surface 52.

 プリズム60は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面61を有する。 The prism 60 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 61.

 プリズム70は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面71及び面72を有する。プリズム50(面52)とプリズム70(面71)との間にはエアギャップが設けられており、面72で反射された青成分光B及びDMD500Bから出射された青成分光Bが面71に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも大きいため、面72で反射された青成分光B及びDMD500Bから出射された青成分光Bは面71で反射される。 The prism 70 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 71 and a surface 72. An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), and the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are formed on the surface 71. Since the incident angle (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle, the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are reflected by the surface 71.

 面72は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを透過して、青成分光Bを反射するダイクロイックミラー面である。従って、面51で反射された光のうち、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gは面72を透過し、青成分光Bは面72で反射される。面71で反射された青成分光Bは面72で反射される。 The surface 72 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the red component light R and the green component light G and reflects the blue component light B. Accordingly, among the light reflected by the surface 51, the red component light R and the green component light G are transmitted through the surface 72, and the blue component light B is reflected by the surface 72. The blue component light B reflected by the surface 71 is reflected by the surface 72.

 プリズム80は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面81及び面82を有する。プリズム70(面72)とプリズム80(面81)との間にはエアギャップが設けられており、面81を透過して面82で反射された赤成分光R及びDMD500Rから出射された赤成分光Rが再び面81に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも大きいため、面81を透過して面82で反射された赤成分光R及びDMD500Rから出射された赤成分光Rは面81で反射される。一方で、DMD500Rから出射されて面81で反射された後に面82で反射された赤成分光Rが再び面81に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも小さいため、DMD500Rから出射されて面81で反射された後に面82で反射された赤成分光Rは面81を透過する。 The prism 80 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 81 and a surface 82. An air gap is provided between the prism 70 (surface 72) and the prism 80 (surface 81). The red component light R transmitted through the surface 81 and reflected by the surface 82 and the red component emitted from the DMD 500R. Since the angle (incident angle) at which the light R again enters the surface 81 is larger than the total reflection angle, the red component light R transmitted through the surface 81 and reflected by the surface 82 and the red component light R emitted from the DMD 500R are Reflected by the surface 81. On the other hand, since the angle (incident angle) at which the red component light R emitted from the DMD 500R and reflected by the surface 81 and then reflected by the surface 82 is incident on the surface 81 again is smaller than the total reflection angle, it is emitted from the DMD 500R. Then, the red component light R reflected by the surface 82 after being reflected by the surface 81 passes through the surface 81.

 面82は、緑成分光Gを透過して、赤成分光Rを反射するダイクロイックミラー面である。従って、面81を透過した光のうち、緑成分光Gは面82を透過し、赤成分光Rは面82で反射される。面81で反射された赤成分光Rは面82で反射される。DMD500Gから出射された緑成分光Gは面82を透過する。 The surface 82 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the green component light G and reflects the red component light R. Accordingly, among the light transmitted through the surface 81, the green component light G is transmitted through the surface 82, and the red component light R is reflected by the surface 82. The red component light R reflected by the surface 81 is reflected by the surface 82. The green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G passes through the surface 82.

 ここで、プリズム70は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを含む合成光と青成分光Bとを面72によって分離する。プリズム80は、赤成分光Rと緑成分光Gとを面82によって分離する。すなわち、プリズム70及びプリズム80は、各色成分光を分離する色分離素子として機能する。 Here, the prism 70 separates the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B by the surface 72. The prism 80 separates the red component light R and the green component light G by the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color separation element that separates each color component light.

 なお、第2実施形態では、プリズム70の面72のカットオフ波長は、緑色に相当する波長帯と青色に相当する波長帯との間に設けられる。プリズム80の面82のカットオフ波長は、赤色に相当する波長帯と緑色に相当する波長帯との間に設けられる。 In the second embodiment, the cutoff wavelength of the surface 72 of the prism 70 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to green and a wavelength band corresponding to blue. The cut-off wavelength of the surface 82 of the prism 80 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to red and a wavelength band corresponding to green.

 一方で、プリズム70は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを含む合成光と青成分光Bとを面72によって合成する。プリズム80は、赤成分光Rと緑成分光Gとを面82によって合成する。すなわち、プリズム70及びプリズム80は、各色成分光を合成する色合成素子として機能する。 On the other hand, the prism 70 combines the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B with the surface 72. The prism 80 combines the red component light R and the green component light G with the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color composition element that synthesizes each color component light.

 プリズム90は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面91を有する。面91は、緑成分光Gを透過するように構成されている。なお、DMD500Gへ入射する緑成分光G及びDMD500Gから出射された緑成分光Gは面91を透過する。 The prism 90 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 91. The surface 91 is configured to transmit the green component light G. The green component light G incident on the DMD 500G and the green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G pass through the surface 91.

 DMD500R、DMD500G及びDMD500Bは、複数の微少ミラーによって構成されており、複数の微少ミラーは可動式である。各微少ミラーは、基本的に1画素に相当する。DMD500Rは、各微少ミラーの角度を変更することによって、投写ユニット150側に赤成分光Rを反射するか否かを切り替える。同様に、DMD500G及びDMD500Bは、各微少ミラーの角度を変更することによって、投写ユニット150側に緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを反射するか否かを切り替える。 DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B are configured by a plurality of micromirrors, and the plurality of micromirrors are movable. Each minute mirror basically corresponds to one pixel. The DMD 500R switches whether to reflect the red component light R toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror. Similarly, the DMD 500G and the DMD 500B switch whether to reflect the green component light G and the blue component light B toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror.

 投写ユニット150は、投写レンズ群151と、凹面ミラー152とを有する。 The projection unit 150 includes a projection lens group 151 and a concave mirror 152.

 投写レンズ群151は、色分離合成ユニット140から出射された光(映像光)を凹面ミラー152側に出射する。 The projection lens group 151 emits light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 to the concave mirror 152 side.

 凹面ミラー152は、投写レンズ群151から出射された光(映像光)を反射する。凹面ミラー152は、映像光を集光した上で、映像光を広角化する。例えば、凹面ミラー152は、投写レンズ群151側に凹面を有する非球面ミラーである。 The concave mirror 152 reflects light (image light) emitted from the projection lens group 151. The concave mirror 152 condenses the image light and then widens the image light. For example, the concave mirror 152 is an aspherical mirror having a concave surface on the projection lens group 151 side.

 凹面ミラー152で集光された映像光は、天板240に設けられた天板凹部180の傾斜面181に設けられた透過領域を透過する。傾斜面181に設けられた透過領域は、凹面ミラー152によって映像光が集光される位置近傍に設けられることが好ましい。 The image light collected by the concave mirror 152 passes through a transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 of the top plate recess 180 provided on the top plate 240. The transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the position where the image light is collected by the concave mirror 152.

 凹面ミラー152は、上述したように、前面側凸部170によって形成される空間に収容される。例えば、凹面ミラー152は、前面側凸部170の内側に固定されることが好ましい。また、前面側凸部170の内側面の形状は、凹面ミラー152に沿った形状であることが好ましい。 The concave mirror 152 is accommodated in the space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 as described above. For example, the concave mirror 152 is preferably fixed inside the front side convex portion 170. In addition, the shape of the inner surface of the front side convex portion 170 is preferably a shape along the concave mirror 152.

 ここで、第2実施形態では、色分離合成ユニット140は、上述したように、拡散光学素子600(スペックルノイズ低減素子)を有する。拡散光学素子600は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光路上において、光源ユニット110とDMD500との間に設けられており、光源ユニット110から出射された光のスペックルノイズを低減するユニットである。言い換えると、拡散光学素子600は、スペックルを低減するために、白色光Wの空間コヒーレンスを低減させる光学素子である。具体的には、拡散光学素子600は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wによって均一化された白色光Wを拡散するとともに白色光Wを透過する。例えば、拡散光学素子600の構成としては、以下に示す構成が考えられる。 Here, in the second embodiment, the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes the diffusion optical element 600 (speckle noise reduction element) as described above. The diffusing optical element 600 is provided between the light source unit 110 and the DMD 500 on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110, and is a unit that reduces speckle noise of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. is there. In other words, the diffusion optical element 600 is an optical element that reduces the spatial coherence of the white light W in order to reduce speckle. Specifically, the diffusion optical element 600 diffuses the white light W made uniform by the rod integrator 10W and transmits the white light W. For example, the configuration shown below can be considered as the configuration of the diffusing optical element 600.

 (第1構成例)
 第1構成例では、図22に示すように、拡散光学素子600は、ガラス板710と、拡散面711と、拡散面712とを有する。
(First configuration example)
In the first configuration example, as illustrated in FIG. 22, the diffusion optical element 600 includes a glass plate 710, a diffusion surface 711, and a diffusion surface 712.

 ガラス板710は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光路上において、光源ユニット110とDMD500との間に配置される。詳細には、第2実施形態では、ガラス板710は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射側に配置される。 The glass plate 710 is disposed between the light source unit 110 and the DMD 500 on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the glass plate 710 is disposed on the light emitting side of the rod integrator 10W.

 ガラス板710は、2つの主面を有しており、2つの主面は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光軸に対して略垂直な面である。 The glass plate 710 has two main surfaces, and the two main surfaces are surfaces substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the light emitted from the light source unit 110.

 拡散面711は、ガラス板710の2つの主面のうち、一方の主面に設けられる。具体的には、拡散面711は、光源ユニット110側に設けられた主面に設けられる。また、拡散面711は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光軸中心を含む中心領域に設けられる。なお、拡散面711は、光源ユニット110から出射される光を拡散するとともに、光源ユニット110から出射される光を透過する。 The diffusion surface 711 is provided on one main surface of the two main surfaces of the glass plate 710. Specifically, the diffusing surface 711 is provided on the main surface provided on the light source unit 110 side. Further, the diffusion surface 711 is provided in a central region including the optical axis center of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. The diffusion surface 711 diffuses the light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits the light emitted from the light source unit 110.

 拡散面712は、ガラス板710の2つの主面のうち、他方の主面に設けられる。具体的には、拡散面712は、光源ユニット110の反対側に設けられた主面に設けられる。また、拡散面712は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光軸中心を含む中心領域の周辺に設けられる周辺領域に設けられる。なお、拡散面712は、光源ユニット110から出射される光を拡散するとともに、光源ユニット110から出射される光を透過する。 The diffusion surface 712 is provided on the other main surface of the two main surfaces of the glass plate 710. Specifically, the diffusion surface 712 is provided on the main surface provided on the opposite side of the light source unit 110. Further, the diffusing surface 712 is provided in a peripheral region provided around the central region including the optical axis center of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. The diffusion surface 712 diffuses the light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits the light emitted from the light source unit 110.

 このように、中心領域では、拡散面711及び拡散面712の双方によって光源ユニット110から出射される光が拡散される。周辺領域では、拡散面712のみによって光源ユニット110から出射される光が拡散される。 As described above, in the central region, the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is diffused by both the diffusion surface 711 and the diffusion surface 712. In the peripheral region, the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is diffused only by the diffusion surface 712.

 従って、拡散光学素子600全体としては、中心領域の拡散度は、周辺領域の拡散度よりも大きい。 Therefore, in the entire diffusion optical element 600, the diffusivity in the central region is larger than that in the peripheral region.

 (第2構成例)
 第2構成例では、図23に示すように、拡散光学素子600は、ガラス板720と、拡散面721と、ガラス板730と、拡散面731とを有する。
(Second configuration example)
In the second configuration example, as illustrated in FIG. 23, the diffusion optical element 600 includes a glass plate 720, a diffusion surface 721, a glass plate 730, and a diffusion surface 731.

 ガラス板720は、2つの主面を有しており、2つの主面は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光軸に対して略垂直な面である。同様に、ガラス板730は、2つの主面を有しており、2つの主面は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光軸に対して略垂直な面である。 The glass plate 720 has two main surfaces, and the two main surfaces are surfaces substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. Similarly, the glass plate 730 has two main surfaces, and the two main surfaces are surfaces substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of the light emitted from the light source unit 110.

 拡散面721は、ガラス板720の2つの主面のうち、一方の主面に設けられる。例えば、拡散面721は、光源ユニット110側に設けられた主面に設けられる。また、拡散面721は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光軸中心を含む中心領域に設けられる。なお、拡散面721は、光源ユニット110から出射される光を拡散するとともに、光源ユニット110から出射される光を透過する。なお、拡散面721は、光源ユニット110の反対側に設けられた主面に設けられてもよい。 The diffusion surface 721 is provided on one main surface of the two main surfaces of the glass plate 720. For example, the diffusing surface 721 is provided on the main surface provided on the light source unit 110 side. Further, the diffusing surface 721 is provided in a central region including the optical axis center of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. The diffusion surface 721 diffuses the light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits the light emitted from the light source unit 110. The diffusing surface 721 may be provided on the main surface provided on the opposite side of the light source unit 110.

 拡散面731は、ガラス板730の2つの主面のうち、一方の主面に設けられる。例えば、拡散面731は、光源ユニット110側に設けられた主面に設けられる。また、拡散面731は、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光軸中心を含む中心領域の周辺に設けられる周辺領域に設けられる。なお、拡散面731は、光源ユニット110から出射される光を拡散するとともに、光源ユニット110から出射される光を透過する。なお、拡散面731は、光源ユニット110の反対側に設けられた主面に設けられてもよい。 The diffusion surface 731 is provided on one main surface of the two main surfaces of the glass plate 730. For example, the diffusing surface 731 is provided on the main surface provided on the light source unit 110 side. Further, the diffusing surface 731 is provided in a peripheral region provided around the central region including the optical axis center of the light emitted from the light source unit 110. The diffusion surface 731 diffuses light emitted from the light source unit 110 and transmits light emitted from the light source unit 110. The diffusing surface 731 may be provided on a main surface provided on the opposite side of the light source unit 110.

 このように、中心領域では、拡散面721及び拡散面731の双方によって光源ユニット110から出射される光が拡散される。周辺領域では、拡散面731のみによって光源ユニット110から出射される光が拡散される。 Thus, in the central region, the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is diffused by both the diffusion surface 721 and the diffusion surface 731. In the peripheral region, the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is diffused only by the diffusion surface 731.

 従って、拡散光学素子600全体としては、中心領域の拡散度は、周辺領域の拡散度よりも大きい。 Therefore, in the entire diffusion optical element 600, the diffusivity in the central region is larger than that in the peripheral region.

 (制御ユニットの構成)
 以下において、第2実施形態に係る制御ユニットについて、図面を参照しながら説明する。図24は、第2実施形態に係る制御ユニット800を示すブロック図である。制御ユニット800は、投写型映像表示装置100に設けられており、投写型映像表示装置100を制御する。
(Configuration of control unit)
Hereinafter, a control unit according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing a control unit 800 according to the second embodiment. The control unit 800 is provided in the projection display apparatus 100 and controls the projection display apparatus 100.

 なお、制御ユニット800は、映像入力信号を映像出力信号に変換する。映像入力信号は、赤入力信号Rin、緑入力信号Gin及び青入力信号Binによって構成される。映像出力信号は、赤出力信号Rout、緑出力信号Gout及び青出力信号Boutによって構成される。映像入力信号及び映像出力信号は、1フレームを構成する複数の画素毎に入力される信号である。 The control unit 800 converts the video input signal into a video output signal. The video input signal includes a red input signal R in , a green input signal G in, and a blue input signal B in . The video output signal includes a red output signal Rout , a green output signal Gout, and a blue output signal Bout . The video input signal and the video output signal are signals input for each of a plurality of pixels constituting one frame.

 図24に示すように、制御ユニット800は、素子制御部810を有する。素子制御部810は、所定動作パターンで動作するように拡散光学素子600を制御する。例えば、素子制御部810は、拡散光学素子600を駆動する駆動装置の制御によって、拡散光学素子600を所定動作パターンで振動させる。 As shown in FIG. 24, the control unit 800 includes an element control unit 810. The element control unit 810 controls the diffusion optical element 600 so as to operate in a predetermined operation pattern. For example, the element control unit 810 causes the diffusion optical element 600 to vibrate in a predetermined operation pattern under the control of a driving device that drives the diffusion optical element 600.

 拡散光学素子600が図23に示す第2構成例である場合には、素子制御部810は、ガラス板720(拡散面721)及びガラス板730(拡散面731)を独立して制御することができる。このようなケースでは、拡散面721の振動位相をφとし、拡散面731の振動位相をφ’とした場合に、制御ユニット800は、φ’≠φ+nπの関係が満たされるように、拡散光学素子600を制御してもよい。 When the diffusing optical element 600 is the second configuration example shown in FIG. 23, the element control unit 810 can independently control the glass plate 720 (diffusing surface 721) and the glass plate 730 (diffusing surface 731). it can. In such a case, when the vibration phase of the diffusing surface 721 is φ and the vibration phase of the diffusing surface 731 is φ ′, the control unit 800 allows the diffusion optical element to satisfy the relationship of φ ′ ≠ φ + nπ. 600 may be controlled.

 (作用及び効果)
 第2実施形態では、拡散光学素子600は、投写ユニットの射出瞳面における光強度の空間分布を均一化する。従って、投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)から投写面の1点に至る光の強度が均一な角度分布となるため、角度重畳によるスペックルノイズ低減効果が十分に発揮され、スペックルノイズを効果的に除去することができる。
(Action and effect)
In the second embodiment, the diffusing optical element 600 makes the spatial distribution of the light intensity uniform on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit. Accordingly, since the intensity of light from the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit to one point on the projection plane has a uniform angular distribution, the speckle noise reduction effect due to angle superposition is sufficiently exerted, and speckle noise is reduced. It can be effectively removed.

 なお、第2実施形態では、拡散光学素子600は、中心領域の拡散度が周辺領域の拡散度よりも大きい構成を有する。すなわち、拡散光学素子600の中心領域を通る光は、拡散光学素子600の周辺領域を通る光よりも拡散される。従って、投写ユニットの射出瞳面における光強度の空間分布が均一化される。 In the second embodiment, the diffusing optical element 600 has a configuration in which the diffusivity of the central region is larger than the diffusivity of the peripheral region. That is, the light passing through the central region of the diffusing optical element 600 is diffused more than the light passing through the peripheral region of the diffusing optical element 600. Accordingly, the spatial distribution of light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit is made uniform.

 (効果の説明)
 以下において、第2実施形態に係る拡散光学素子600の効果について、図面を参照しながら説明する。
(Explanation of effect)
Hereinafter, effects of the diffusing optical element 600 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings.

 第1に、拡散光学素子600が設けられていないケース(従来技術)について、光強度の空間分布について説明する。図25及び図26は、従来技術に係る光強度の空間分布を説明するための図である。 First, the spatial distribution of light intensity will be described for a case where the diffusing optical element 600 is not provided (prior art). 25 and 26 are diagrams for explaining the spatial distribution of light intensity according to the related art.

 なお、図25では、投写型映像表示装置に設けられる光学構成が模式的に示されている。具体的には、図25では、光源(ロッドインテグレータ)から出射される光の光路は直線状に模式化されている。また、図25では、投写型映像表示装置に設けられる光学構成として、ロッドインテグレータ、リレー光学系、光変調素子及び投写ユニットが例示されている。 In addition, in FIG. 25, the optical structure provided in a projection type video display apparatus is shown typically. Specifically, in FIG. 25, the optical path of light emitted from the light source (rod integrator) is schematically illustrated in a straight line. FIG. 25 illustrates a rod integrator, a relay optical system, a light modulation element, and a projection unit as an optical configuration provided in the projection display apparatus.

 光源から出射される光の角度分布は、0°を中心とするガウス状の分布である。また、リレー光学系の絞り及び投写ユニットの絞り(射出瞳)は、共役の関係を有する。 The angular distribution of the light emitted from the light source is a Gaussian distribution centered at 0 °. Further, the aperture of the relay optical system and the aperture (exit pupil) of the projection unit have a conjugate relationship.

 図25に示すように、拡散光学素子600が設けられていないケースでは、リレー光学系の絞り面及び投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)における光強度の空間分布は、光源から出射される光の角度分布を反映したガウス状の分布となる。 As shown in FIG. 25, in the case where the diffusing optical element 600 is not provided, the spatial distribution of the light intensity on the diaphragm surface of the relay optical system and the diaphragm surface (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit is the light emitted from the light source. It becomes a Gaussian distribution reflecting the angle distribution.

 従って、投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)から投写面の1点(投写面の中心点)に至る光束について考えると、図26に示すように、周辺領域から投写面の1点に至る光束の強度は、中心領域から投写面の1点に至る光束よりも小さい。すなわち、投写面の1点に至る光の強度が均一な角度分布とならない。 Therefore, when considering the light flux from the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit to one point on the projection plane (center point of the projection plane), as shown in FIG. 26, the light flux from the peripheral region to one point on the projection plane. Is smaller than the light flux from the central region to one point on the projection surface. That is, the intensity of light reaching one point on the projection surface does not have a uniform angular distribution.

 このように、従来技術では、投写面の1点に至る光の強度が均一な角度分布とならないため、角度重畳によるスペックルノイズ低減効果が十分に発揮されずに、スペックルノイズが観測されてしまう。 As described above, in the conventional technology, since the intensity of light reaching one point on the projection surface does not have a uniform angle distribution, the speckle noise reduction effect due to the angle superposition is not sufficiently exhibited, and speckle noise is observed. End up.

 第2に、拡散光学素子600が設けられているケース(第2実施形態)について、光強度の空間分布について説明する。図27及び図28は、第2実施形態に係る光強度の空間分布を説明するための図である。 Second, the spatial distribution of light intensity will be described for the case where the diffusing optical element 600 is provided (second embodiment). 27 and 28 are diagrams for explaining the spatial distribution of light intensity according to the second embodiment.

 なお、図27では、投写型映像表示装置に設けられる光学構成が模式的に示されている。具体的には、図27では、光源(ロッドインテグレータ)から出射される光の光路は直線状に模式化されている。また、図27では、投写型映像表示装置に設けられる光学構成として、ロッドインテグレータ(例えば、ロッドインテグレータ10W)、リレー光学系(レンズ21W、レンズ23、レンズ40)、光変調素子(例えば、DMD500)及び投写ユニット(例えば、投写レンズ群151)が例示されている。 In FIG. 27, an optical configuration provided in the projection display apparatus is schematically shown. Specifically, in FIG. 27, the optical path of light emitted from the light source (rod integrator) is schematically illustrated in a straight line. In FIG. 27, as an optical configuration provided in the projection display apparatus, a rod integrator (for example, rod integrator 10W), a relay optical system (lens 21W, lens 23, lens 40), and a light modulation element (for example, DMD 500). In addition, a projection unit (for example, a projection lens group 151) is illustrated.

 従来技術と同様に、光源から出射される光の角度分布は、0°を中心とするガウス状の分布である。また、リレー光学系の絞り及び投写ユニットの絞り(射出瞳)は、共役の関係を有する。 As in the prior art, the angular distribution of light emitted from the light source is a Gaussian distribution centered on 0 °. Further, the aperture of the relay optical system and the aperture (exit pupil) of the projection unit have a conjugate relationship.

 図27に示すように、拡散光学素子600が設けられているケースでは、リレー光学系の絞り面及び投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)における光強度の空間分布が拡散光学素子600によって均一化される。 As shown in FIG. 27, in the case where the diffusion optical element 600 is provided, the spatial distribution of the light intensity on the diaphragm surface of the relay optical system and the diaphragm surface (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit is made uniform by the diffusion optical element 600. Is done.

 従って、投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)から投写面の1点に至る光束について考えると、図28に示すように、投写面の1点に至る光の強度が均一な角度分布となる。 Therefore, when considering the light flux from the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit to one point on the projection plane, the intensity of light reaching one point on the projection plane has a uniform angular distribution as shown in FIG.

 このように、第2実施形態では、拡散光学素子600の中心領域を通る光が拡散光学素子600の周辺領域を通る光よりも拡散されるため、投写ユニットの絞り面(射出瞳面)における光強度の空間分布が均一化される。これによって、投写面の1点に至る光の強度が均一な角度分布となり、角度重畳によるスペックルノイズ低減効果が十分に発揮され、スペックルノイズが効率的に除去される。 As described above, in the second embodiment, the light passing through the central region of the diffusing optical element 600 is diffused more than the light passing through the peripheral region of the diffusing optical element 600. Therefore, the light on the aperture plane (exit pupil plane) of the projection unit The spatial distribution of intensity is made uniform. As a result, the intensity of light reaching one point on the projection surface has a uniform angular distribution, the effect of reducing speckle noise by the angle superposition is sufficiently exhibited, and speckle noise is efficiently removed.

 [第3実施形態の概要]
 (第3実施形態の課題)
 投写型映像表示装置の発散光路中に光拡散素子が設置されていると共に光拡散素子が光の進行方向と平行方向に振動するようにすると光の発散角が増大するため、投写レンズに取り込めない角度成分の光が損失となる。
[Outline of Third Embodiment]
(Problem of the third embodiment)
If a light diffusing element is installed in the diverging light path of the projection display apparatus and the light diffusing element vibrates in a direction parallel to the traveling direction of light, the light divergence angle increases, so that it cannot be captured by the projection lens. The light of the angle component is lost.

 また、この光損失が発生しないようにするためには、F値の小さい投写レンズが必要になるが十分な結像性能が得られるように設計するには難易度が上昇し、大型のレンズが必要とされるためコストも増大することになる。 Further, in order to prevent this light loss from occurring, a projection lens having a small F-number is required, but the degree of difficulty increases in designing to obtain sufficient imaging performance. The cost increases because it is required.

 (第3実施形態の構成)
 第3実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置は、コヒーレント光源によって構成される光源ユニットと、該光源ユニットの光軸に略直交するように振動、揺動、又は回転させることによりスペックルノイズを低減させるスペックルノイズ低減素子と、前記コヒーレント光源から出射される光を変調する光変調素子と、該光変調素子により変調された光を投写する投写ユニットを備える投写型映像表示装置であって、前記スペックルノイズ低減素子は、焦点距離fを有する第1のレンズアレイと焦点距離f’を有する第2のレンズアレイとを有し、それぞれのレンズアレイに挟まれる媒質の間隔は絶対屈折率をnとしたとき略(f+f’)/nであることを特徴とする。
(Configuration of Third Embodiment)
The projection display apparatus according to the third embodiment reduces speckle noise by oscillating, swinging, or rotating a light source unit configured by a coherent light source and substantially orthogonal to the optical axis of the light source unit. A projection-type image display device comprising: a speckle noise reducing element to be controlled; a light modulation element that modulates light emitted from the coherent light source; and a projection unit that projects light modulated by the light modulation element. The speckle noise reduction element has a first lens array having a focal length f and a second lens array having a focal length f ′, and the interval between the media sandwiched between the lens arrays makes the absolute refractive index n. Is approximately (f + f ′) / n.

 スペックルノイズ低減素子の形状が焦点距離fを有する第1のレンズアレイと焦点距離f‘を有する第2のレンズアレイを具備し、それぞれのレンズアレイに挟まれる媒質の間隔は絶対屈折率をnとしたとき略(f+f’)/nである。本構成にすることでスペックルノイズ低減素子に入射する光の入射側発散角と出射する光の出射側発散角を同一にすることができる。従って、スペックルノイズ低減素子に入射前と出射後の光の発散角が増大させることがないため、投写レンズに取り込めない角度成分が発生しにくく、投写型映像表示装置の光損失を減少させることができる。 The speckle noise reduction element has a first lens array having a focal length f and a second lens array having a focal length f ′, and the distance between the media sandwiched between the lens arrays is an absolute refractive index n. Is approximately (f + f ′) / n. With this configuration, the incident-side divergence angle of the light incident on the speckle noise reduction element can be made the same as the emission-side divergence angle of the emitted light. Accordingly, since the divergence angle of light before and after entering the speckle noise reduction element does not increase, an angle component that cannot be captured by the projection lens is hardly generated, and light loss of the projection display apparatus is reduced. Can do.

 また照明光学系内に配置したスペックルノイズ低減素子を振動、揺動、又は回転させることで、スペックルノイズ低減素子から出射する各光線の位置及び位相が時間と共に変化する。これにより、スクリーン面における各点へ入射する各光線の角度及び位相が時間と共に変化するため、スペックルパターンが時間重畳され、視認されるスペックルノイズが低減される。 Also, the position and phase of each light beam emitted from the speckle noise reduction element changes with time by vibrating, swinging, or rotating the speckle noise reduction element arranged in the illumination optical system. Thereby, since the angle and phase of each light ray incident on each point on the screen surface change with time, the speckle pattern is superimposed on time, and the speckle noise that is visually recognized is reduced.

 従って、コヒーレント光源を用いた投写型映像表示装置において、スペックルノイズを減少させ、光の発散角が増大することによる光損失を減少させることができる。 Therefore, in a projection display apparatus using a coherent light source, speckle noise can be reduced, and light loss due to an increase in light divergence angle can be reduced.

 [第3実施形態]
 (投写型映像表示装置の構成)
 以下において、第3実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置の構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図29は、第3実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を示す斜視図である。図30は、第3実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を側方から見た図である。
[Third Embodiment]
(Configuration of projection display device)
The configuration of the projection display apparatus according to the third embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 30 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment.

 図29及び図30に示すように、投写型映像表示装置100は、筐体200を有しており、投写面300に映像を投写する。投写型映像表示装置100は、第1配置面(図30に示す壁面420)と第1配置面に略垂直な第2配置面(図30に示す床面410)とに沿って配置される。 As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the projection display apparatus 100 has a casing 200 and projects an image on the projection plane 300. The projection display apparatus 100 is arranged along a first arrangement surface (wall surface 420 shown in FIG. 30) and a second arrangement surface (floor surface 410 shown in FIG. 30) substantially perpendicular to the first arrangement surface.

 ここで、第3実施形態では、投写型映像表示装置100が壁面に設けられた投写面300に映像光を投写するケースについて例示する(壁面投写)。このようなケースにおける筐体200の配置を壁面投写配置と称する。第3実施形態では、投写面300と略平行な第1配置面は壁面420である。 Here, the third embodiment exemplifies a case in which the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto the projection plane 300 provided on the wall surface (wall surface projection). The arrangement of the casing 200 in such a case is referred to as a wall surface projection arrangement. In the third embodiment, the first arrangement surface that is substantially parallel to the projection plane 300 is the wall surface 420.

 第3実施形態では、投写面300に平行な水平方向を“幅方向”と称する。投写面300の法線方向を“奥行き方向”と称する。幅方向及び奥行き方向の双方に直交する方向を“高さ方向”と称する。 In the third embodiment, a horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “width direction”. The normal direction of the projection plane 300 is referred to as “depth direction”. A direction orthogonal to both the width direction and the depth direction is referred to as a “height direction”.

 筐体200は、略直方体形状を有する。奥行き方向における筐体200のサイズ及び高さ方向における筐体200のサイズは、幅方向における筐体200のサイズよりも小さい。奥行き方向における筐体200のサイズは、反射ミラー(図30に示す凹面ミラー152)から投写面300までの投写距離と略等しい。幅方向において、筐体200のサイズは、投写面300のサイズと略等しい。高さ方向において、筐体200のサイズは、投写面300が設けられる位置に応じて定められる。 The housing 200 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The size of the housing 200 in the depth direction and the size of the housing 200 in the height direction are smaller than the size of the housing 200 in the width direction. The size of the casing 200 in the depth direction is substantially equal to the projection distance from the reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 30) to the projection plane 300. In the width direction, the size of the casing 200 is substantially equal to the size of the projection plane 300. In the height direction, the size of the housing 200 is determined according to the position where the projection plane 300 is provided.

 具体的には、筐体200は、投写面側側壁210と、前面側側壁220と、底面板230と、天板240と、第1側面側側壁250と、第2側面側側壁260とを有する。 Specifically, the housing 200 includes a projection surface side wall 210, a front surface side wall 220, a bottom plate 230, a top plate 240, a first side surface side wall 250, and a second side surface side wall 260. .

 投写面側側壁210は、投写面300と略平行な第1配置面(第3実施形態では、壁面420)と対向する板状の部材である。前面側側壁220は、投写面側側壁210の反対側に設けられた板状の部材である。底面板230は、投写面300と略平行な第1配置面と略垂直な第2配置面(第3実施形態では、床面410)に対向する板状の部材である。天板240は、底面板230の反対側に設けられた板状の部材である。第1側面側側壁250及び第2側面側側壁260は、幅方向において筐体200の両端を形成する板状の部材である。 The projection surface side wall 210 is a plate-like member facing a first arrangement surface (in the third embodiment, a wall surface 420) substantially parallel to the projection surface 300. The front side wall 220 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the projection plane side wall 210. The bottom plate 230 is a plate-like member that faces a second arrangement surface (in the third embodiment, the floor surface 410) that is substantially perpendicular to the first arrangement surface that is substantially parallel to the projection plane 300. The top plate 240 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the bottom plate 230. The first side wall 250 and the second side wall 260 are plate-like members that form both ends of the housing 200 in the width direction.

 筐体200は、光源ユニット110と、電源ユニット120と、冷却ユニット130と、色分離合成ユニット140と、投写ユニット150とを収容する。投写面側側壁210は、投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bを有する。前面側側壁220は、前面側凸部170を有する。天板240は、天板凹部180を有する。第1側面側側壁250は、ケーブル端子190を有する。 The housing 200 accommodates the light source unit 110, the power supply unit 120, the cooling unit 130, the color separation / combination unit 140, and the projection unit 150. The projection surface side sidewall 210 has a projection surface side recess 160A and a projection surface side recess 160B. The front side wall 220 has a front side convex portion 170. The top plate 240 has a top plate recess 180. The first side wall 250 has a cable terminal 190.

 光源ユニット110は、複数のコヒーレント光源(図32に示すコヒーレント光源111)によって構成されるユニットである。各コヒーレント光源は、LD(Laser Diode)などの光源である。第3実施形態では、光源ユニット110には、赤成分光Rを出射する赤コヒーレント光源(図32に示す赤コヒーレント光源111R)、緑成分光Gを出射する緑コヒーレント光源(図32に示す緑コヒーレント光源111G)、青成分光Bを出射する青コヒーレント光源(図32に示す青コヒーレント光源111B)を有する。光源ユニット110の詳細については後述する(図32を参照)。 The light source unit 110 is a unit composed of a plurality of coherent light sources (coherent light source 111 shown in FIG. 32). Each coherent light source is a light source such as an LD (Laser Diode). In the third embodiment, the light source unit 110 includes a red coherent light source that emits red component light R (red coherent light source 111R shown in FIG. 32) and a green coherent light source that emits green component light G (green coherent light source shown in FIG. 32). Light source 111G) and a blue coherent light source that emits blue component light B (blue coherent light source 111B shown in FIG. 32). Details of the light source unit 110 will be described later (see FIG. 32).

 電源ユニット120は、投写型映像表示装置100に電力を供給するユニットである。例えば、電源ユニット120は、光源ユニット110及び冷却ユニット130に電力を供給する。 The power supply unit 120 is a unit that supplies power to the projection display apparatus 100. For example, the power supply unit 120 supplies power to the light source unit 110 and the cooling unit 130.

 冷却ユニット130は、光源ユニット110に設けられた複数のコヒーレント光源を冷却するユニットである。具体的には、冷却ユニット130は、各コヒーレント光源を載置する冷却ジャケット(図32に示す冷却ジャケット131)を冷却することによって、各コヒーレント光源を冷却する。 The cooling unit 130 is a unit that cools a plurality of coherent light sources provided in the light source unit 110. Specifically, the cooling unit 130 cools each coherent light source by cooling a cooling jacket (cooling jacket 131 shown in FIG. 32) on which each coherent light source is placed.

 なお、冷却ユニット130は、各コヒーレント光源以外にも、電源ユニット120や光変調素子(後述するDMD500)を冷却するように構成されている。 The cooling unit 130 is configured to cool the power supply unit 120 and the light modulation element (DMD 500 described later) in addition to each coherent light source.

 色分離合成ユニット140は、赤コヒーレント光源から出射された赤成分光R、緑コヒーレント光源から出射された緑成分光G、青コヒーレント光源から出射された青成分光Bを合成する。また、色分離合成ユニット140は、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを含む合成光を分離して、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを変調する。さらに、色分離合成ユニット140は、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを再合成して、映像光を投写ユニット150に出射する。色分離合成ユニット140の詳細については後述する(図33を参照)。 The color separation / combination unit 140 combines the red component light R emitted from the red coherent light source, the green component light G emitted from the green coherent light source, and the blue component light B emitted from the blue coherent light source. The color separation / combination unit 140 separates the combined light including the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and modulates the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B. Further, the color separation / combination unit 140 recombines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and emits image light to the projection unit 150. Details of the color separation / synthesis unit 140 will be described later (see FIG. 33).

 投写ユニット150は、色分離合成ユニット140から出射された光(映像光)を投写面300に投写する。具体的には、投写ユニット150は、色分離合成ユニット140から出射された光を投写面300上に投写する投写レンズ群(図33に示す投写レンズ群151)と、投写レンズ群から出射された光を投写面300側に反射する反射ミラー(図33に示す凹面ミラー152)とを有する。投写ユニット150の詳細については後述する。 The projection unit 150 projects the light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300. Specifically, the projection unit 150 projects the light emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 onto the projection plane 300 (projection lens group 151 shown in FIG. 33) and the projection lens group. A reflecting mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 33) that reflects light toward the projection plane 300; Details of the projection unit 150 will be described later.

 投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bは、投写面側側壁210に設けられており、筐体200の内側に窪む形状を有する。投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bは、筐体200の端まで延びている。投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bには、筐体200の内側に連通する通気口が設けられる。 The projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B are provided on the projection surface side wall 210 and have a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200. The projection surface side recess 160 </ b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 </ b> B extend to the end of the housing 200. The projection surface side recess 160 </ b> A and the projection surface side recess 160 </ b> B are provided with vent holes that communicate with the inside of the housing 200.

 第3実施形態では、投写面側凹部160A及び投写面側凹部160Bは、筐体200の幅方向に沿って延びている。例えば、投写面側凹部160Aには、筐体200の外側の空気を筐体200の内側に入れるための吸気口が通気口として設けられる。投写面側凹部160Bには、筐体200の内側の空気を筐体200の外側に出すための排気口が通気口として設けられる。 In the third embodiment, the projection surface side recess 160A and the projection surface side recess 160B extend along the width direction of the housing 200. For example, the projection surface side recess 160 </ b> A is provided with an air inlet for allowing air outside the housing 200 to enter the housing 200 as a vent. The projection surface side recess 160 </ b> B is provided with an exhaust port for venting air inside the housing 200 to the outside of the housing 200 as a vent.

 前面側凸部170は、前面側側壁220に設けられており、筐体200の外側に張り出す形状を有する。前面側凸部170は、筐体200の幅方向において、前面側側壁220の略中央に設けられる。筐体200の内側において前面側凸部170によって形成される空間には、投写ユニット150に設けられた反射ミラー(図33に示す凹面ミラー152)が収容される。 The front side convex portion 170 is provided on the front side wall 220 and has a shape protruding to the outside of the housing 200. The front side convex portion 170 is provided at the approximate center of the front side wall 220 in the width direction of the housing 200. A reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 33) provided in the projection unit 150 is accommodated in a space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 inside the housing 200.

 天板凹部180は、天板240に設けられており、筐体200の内側に窪む形状を有する。天板凹部180は、投写面300側に向けて下る傾斜面181を有する。傾斜面181は、投写ユニット150から出射された光を投写面300側に透過(投写)する透過領域を有する。 The top plate recess 180 is provided in the top plate 240 and has a shape that is recessed inside the housing 200. The top plate recess 180 has an inclined surface 181 that goes down toward the projection plane 300 side. The inclined surface 181 has a transmission region that transmits (projects) the light emitted from the projection unit 150 to the projection surface 300 side.

 ケーブル端子190は、第1側面側側壁250に設けられており、電源端子や映像端子などの端子である。なお、ケーブル端子190は、第2側面側側壁260に設けられていてもよい。 The cable terminal 190 is provided on the first side wall 250 and is a terminal such as a power terminal or a video terminal. The cable terminal 190 may be provided on the second side wall 260.

 (筐体の幅方向における各ユニットの配置)
 以下において、第3実施形態に係る幅方向における各ユニットの配置について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図31は、第3実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を上方から見た図である。
(Arrangement of units in the width direction of the housing)
Hereinafter, the arrangement of the units in the width direction according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 31 is a top view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the third embodiment.

 図31に示すように、投写ユニット150は、投写面300に平行な水平方向(筐体200の幅方向)において、筐体200の略中央に配置される。 As shown in FIG. 31, the projection unit 150 is arranged in the approximate center of the casing 200 in the horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 (the width direction of the casing 200).

 光源ユニット110及び冷却ユニット130は、筐体200の幅方向において、投写ユニット150と並んで配置される。具体的には、光源ユニット110は、筐体200の幅方向において、投写ユニット150の一方(第2側面側側壁260側)に並んで配置される。冷却ユニット130は、筐体200の幅方向において、投写ユニット150の他方(第1側面側側壁250側)に並んで配置される。 The light source unit 110 and the cooling unit 130 are arranged side by side with the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the housing 200. Specifically, the light source unit 110 is arranged side by side on the one side (second side wall 260 side) of the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the casing 200. The cooling unit 130 is arranged side by side on the other side (first side wall 250 side) of the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the casing 200.

 電源ユニット120は、筐体200の幅方向において、投写ユニット150と並んで配置される。具体的には、電源ユニット120は、筐体200の幅方向において、投写ユニット150に対して光源ユニット110側に並んで配置される。電源ユニット120は、投写ユニット150と光源ユニット110との間に配置されることが好ましい。 The power supply unit 120 is arranged side by side with the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the casing 200. Specifically, the power supply unit 120 is arranged side by side on the light source unit 110 side with respect to the projection unit 150 in the width direction of the casing 200. The power supply unit 120 is preferably disposed between the projection unit 150 and the light source unit 110.

 (光源ユニットの構成)
 以下において、第3実施形態に係る光源ユニットの構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図32は、第3実施形態に係る光源ユニット110を示す図である。
(Configuration of light source unit)
Hereinafter, the configuration of the light source unit according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the light source unit 110 according to the third embodiment.

 図32に示すように、光源ユニット110は、複数の赤コヒーレント光源111R、複数の緑コヒーレント光源111G及び複数の青コヒーレント光源111Bによって構成される。 32, the light source unit 110 includes a plurality of red coherent light sources 111R, a plurality of green coherent light sources 111G, and a plurality of blue coherent light sources 111B.

 赤コヒーレント光源111Rは、上述したように、赤成分光Rを出射するLDなどの赤コヒーレント光源である。赤コヒーレント光源111Rは、ヘッド112Rを有しており、ヘッド112Rには、光ファイバ113Rが接続される。 The red coherent light source 111R is a red coherent light source such as an LD that emits the red component light R as described above. The red coherent light source 111R has a head 112R, and an optical fiber 113R is connected to the head 112R.

 各赤コヒーレント光源111Rのヘッド112Rに接続された光ファイバ113Rは、バンドル部114Rで束ねられる。すなわち、各赤コヒーレント光源111Rから出射された光は、各光ファイバ113Rによって伝達されて、バンドル部114Rに集められる。 The optical fibers 113R connected to the heads 112R of each red coherent light source 111R are bundled by a bundle portion 114R. That is, the light emitted from each red coherent light source 111R is transmitted by each optical fiber 113R and collected in the bundle portion 114R.

 赤コヒーレント光源111Rは、冷却ジャケット131Rに載置される。例えば、赤コヒーレント光源111Rは、ネジ止めなどによって冷却ジャケット131Rに固定される。従って、赤コヒーレント光源111Rは、冷却ジャケット131Rによって冷却される。 The red coherent light source 111R is placed on the cooling jacket 131R. For example, the red coherent light source 111R is fixed to the cooling jacket 131R by screwing or the like. Therefore, the red coherent light source 111R is cooled by the cooling jacket 131R.

 緑コヒーレント光源111Gは、上述したように、緑成分光Gを出射するLDなどの緑コヒーレント光源である。緑コヒーレント光源111Gは、ヘッド112Gを有しており、ヘッド112Gには、光ファイバ113Gが接続される。 The green coherent light source 111G is a green coherent light source such as an LD that emits the green component light G as described above. The green coherent light source 111G has a head 112G, and an optical fiber 113G is connected to the head 112G.

 各緑コヒーレント光源111Gのヘッド112Gに接続された光ファイバ113Gは、バンドル部114Gで束ねられる。すなわち、各緑コヒーレント光源111Gから出射された光は、各光ファイバ113Gによって伝達されて、バンドル部114Gに集められる。 The optical fiber 113G connected to the head 112G of each green coherent light source 111G is bundled by the bundle unit 114G. That is, the light emitted from each green coherent light source 111G is transmitted by each optical fiber 113G and collected in the bundle unit 114G.

 緑コヒーレント光源111Gは、冷却ジャケット131Gに載置される。例えば、緑コヒーレント光源111Gは、ネジ止めなどによって冷却ジャケット131Gに固定される。従って、緑コヒーレント光源111Gは、冷却ジャケット131Gによって冷却される。 The green coherent light source 111G is placed on the cooling jacket 131G. For example, the green coherent light source 111G is fixed to the cooling jacket 131G by screwing or the like. Therefore, the green coherent light source 111G is cooled by the cooling jacket 131G.

 コヒーレント光源111Bは、上述したように、青成分光Bを出射するLDなどの青コヒーレント光源である。青コヒーレント光源111Bは、ヘッド112Bを有しており、ヘッド112Bには、光ファイバ113Bが接続される。 The coherent light source 111B is a blue coherent light source such as an LD that emits the blue component light B as described above. The blue coherent light source 111B has a head 112B, and an optical fiber 113B is connected to the head 112B.

 各青コヒーレント光源111Bのヘッド112Bに接続された光ファイバ113Bは、バンドル部114Bで束ねられる。すなわち、各青コヒーレント光源111Bから出射された光は、各光ファイバ113Bによって伝達されて、バンドル部114Bに集められる。 The optical fibers 113B connected to the head 112B of each blue coherent light source 111B are bundled by a bundle unit 114B. That is, the light emitted from each blue coherent light source 111B is transmitted by each optical fiber 113B and collected in the bundle portion 114B.

 青コヒーレント光源111Bは、冷却ジャケット131Bに載置される。例えば、青コヒーレント光源111Bは、ネジ止めなどによって冷却ジャケット131Bに固定される。従って、青コヒーレント光源111Bは、冷却ジャケット131Bによって冷却される。 The blue coherent light source 111B is placed on the cooling jacket 131B. For example, the blue coherent light source 111B is fixed to the cooling jacket 131B by screwing or the like. Therefore, the blue coherent light source 111B is cooled by the cooling jacket 131B.

 (色分離合成ユニット及び投写ユニットの構成)
 以下において、第3実施形態に係る色分離合成ユニット及び投写ユニットの構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図33は、第3実施形態に係る色分離合成ユニット140及び投写ユニット150を示す図である。第3実施形態では、DLP(Digital Light Processing)方式(登録商標)に対応する投写型映像表示装置100を例示する。
(Configuration of color separation / synthesis unit and projection unit)
Hereinafter, configurations of the color separation / synthesis unit and the projection unit according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a color separation / synthesis unit 140 and a projection unit 150 according to the third embodiment. The third embodiment exemplifies a projection display apparatus 100 that supports a DLP (Digital Light Processing) method (registered trademark).

 図33に示すように、色分離合成ユニット140は、第1ユニット141と、第2ユニット142とを有する。 As shown in FIG. 33, the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a first unit 141 and a second unit 142.

 第1ユニット141は、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを合成して、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを含む合成光を第2ユニット142に出射する。 The first unit 141 combines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and outputs the combined light including the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B to the second unit 142. To do.

 具体的には、第1ユニット141は、複数のロッドインテグレータ(ロッドインテグレータ10R、ロッドインテグレータ10G及びロッドインテグレータ10B)と、レンズ群(レンズ21R、レンズ21G、レンズ21B、レンズ22、レンズ23)と、ミラー群(ミラー31、ミラー32、ミラー33、ミラー34及びミラー35)とを有する。 Specifically, the first unit 141 includes a plurality of rod integrators (rod integrator 10R, rod integrator 10G and rod integrator 10B), a lens group (lens 21R, lens 21G, lens 21B, lens 22, lens 23), And a mirror group (mirror 31, mirror 32, mirror 33, mirror 34, and mirror 35).

 ロッドインテグレータ10Rは、光入射面と、光出射面と、光入射面の外周から光出射面の外周に亘って設けられる光反射側面とを有する。ロッドインテグレータ10Rは、バンドル部114Rで束ねられた光ファイバ113Rから出射される赤成分光Rを均一化する。すなわち、ロッドインテグレータ10Rは、光反射側面で赤成分光Rを反射することによって、赤成分光Rを均一化する。 The rod integrator 10R has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface. The rod integrator 10R makes the red component light R emitted from the optical fiber 113R bundled by the bundle portion 114R uniform. In other words, the rod integrator 10R makes the red component light R uniform by reflecting the red component light R on the light reflection side surface.

 ロッドインテグレータ10Gは、光入射面と、光出射面と、光入射面の外周から光出射面の外周に亘って設けられる光反射側面とを有する。ロッドインテグレータ10Gは、バンドル部114Gで束ねられた光ファイバ113Gから出射される緑成分光Gを均一化する。すなわち、ロッドインテグレータ10Gは、光反射側面で緑成分光Gを反射することによって、緑成分光Gを均一化する。 The rod integrator 10G has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface. The rod integrator 10G makes the green component light G emitted from the optical fiber 113G bundled by the bundle portion 114G uniform. That is, the rod integrator 10G makes the green component light G uniform by reflecting the green component light G on the light reflection side surface.

 ロッドインテグレータ10Bは、光入射面と、光出射面と、光入射面の外周から光出射面の外周に亘って設けられる光反射側面とを有する。ロッドインテグレータ10Bは、バンドル部114Bで束ねられた光ファイバ113Bから出射される青成分光Bを均一化する。すなわち、ロッドインテグレータ10Bは、光反射側面で青成分光Bを反射することによって、青成分光Bを均一化する。 The rod integrator 10B has a light incident surface, a light emitting surface, and a light reflecting side surface provided from the outer periphery of the light incident surface to the outer periphery of the light emitting surface. The rod integrator 10B makes the blue component light B emitted from the optical fiber 113B bundled by the bundle portion 114B uniform. That is, the rod integrator 10B makes the blue component light B uniform by reflecting the blue component light B on the light reflection side surface.

 なお、ロッドインテグレータ10R、ロッドインテグレータ10G及びロッドインテグレータ10Bは、光反射側面がミラー面によって構成された中空ロッドであってもよい。また、ロッドインテグレータ10R、ロッドインテグレータ10G及びロッドインテグレータ10Bは、ガラスなどによって構成された中実ロッドであってもよい。 Note that the rod integrator 10R, the rod integrator 10G, and the rod integrator 10B may be hollow rods whose light-reflecting side surfaces are mirror surfaces. Further, the rod integrator 10R, the rod integrator 10G, and the rod integrator 10B may be solid rods made of glass or the like.

 スペックルノイズ低減素子20Rは、光変調素子およびスクリーン面と略共役な面になるロッドインテグレータ10Rの光出射面の直後に配され、ロッドインテグレータ10Rからの赤成分光Rの光軸に対して垂直の方向に周期的に振動、揺動、又は回転している。ここで振動とは、光の光軸を中心として特定の一軸に対して往復運動を行うこと又は光の光軸に平行し往復運動を行うことを示し、揺動とは、光の光軸に対して垂直な面内を略円運動することを示し、回転とは、光の光軸に平行な特定の一軸を中心に回転運動を行うことを示すものとする。スペックルノイズ低減素子20Rは、周期的に振動、揺動、又は回転させることにより、ロッドインテグレータ20Rから出射した赤成分光Rがスペックルノイズ低減素子20Rを通過し出射する際に各光線の出射位置および位相が時間に応じて変更することができる。 The speckle noise reduction element 20R is disposed immediately after the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10R that is substantially conjugate to the light modulation element and the screen surface, and is perpendicular to the optical axis of the red component light R from the rod integrator 10R. Periodically oscillates, swings, or rotates in the direction of. Here, vibration means reciprocating with respect to a specific axis around the optical axis of light, or reciprocating in parallel with the optical axis of light, and oscillation means that the optical axis of light is reciprocated. In contrast, it indicates that the surface moves in a substantially circular plane, and the rotation indicates that the rotation is performed around a specific axis parallel to the optical axis of light. The speckle noise reduction element 20R periodically vibrates, swings, or rotates, so that the red component light R emitted from the rod integrator 20R passes through the speckle noise reduction element 20R and is emitted. The position and phase can be changed according to time.

 スペックルノイズ低減素子20Gは、光変調素子およびスクリーン面の略共役な面になるロッドインテグレータ10Gの光出射面の直後に配され、ロッドインテグレータ10Gからの緑成分光Gの光軸に対して垂直の方向に周期的に振動、揺動、又は回転している。スペックルノイズ低減素子20Gは、周期的に振動、揺動、又は回転させることにより、ロッドインテグレータ20Gから出射した赤成分光Gがスペックルノイズ低減素子20Gを通過し出射する際に各光線の出射位置および位相が時間に応じて変更することができる。 The speckle noise reduction element 20G is disposed immediately after the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10G that is a substantially conjugate surface of the light modulation element and the screen surface, and is perpendicular to the optical axis of the green component light G from the rod integrator 10G. Periodically oscillates, swings, or rotates in the direction of. The speckle noise reduction element 20G periodically vibrates, swings, or rotates so that the red component light G emitted from the rod integrator 20G passes through the speckle noise reduction element 20G and is emitted. The position and phase can be changed according to time.

 スペックルノイズ低減素子20Bは、光変調素子およびスクリーン面の略共役な面になるロッドインテグレータ10Bの光出射面の直後に配され、ロッドインテグレータ10Bからの青成分光Bの光軸に対して垂直の方向に周期的に振動、揺動、又は回転させている。スペックルノイズ低減素子20Bは、周期的に振動、揺動、又は回転させることにより、ロッドインテグレータ20Bから出射した緑成分光Bがスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bを出射した赤成分光Bがスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bを通過し出射する際に各光線の出射位置および位相が時間に応じて変更することができる。 The speckle noise reduction element 20B is disposed immediately after the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10B, which is a substantially conjugate surface of the light modulation element and the screen surface, and is perpendicular to the optical axis of the blue component light B from the rod integrator 10B. Are periodically vibrated, oscillated, or rotated in the direction of. The speckle noise reducing element 20B periodically vibrates, swings, or rotates so that the green component light B emitted from the rod integrator 20B is emitted from the speckle noise reducing element 20B. When the light passes through the reduction element 20B and is emitted, the emission position and phase of each light beam can be changed according to time.

 スペックルノイズは、レーザ光などのコヒーレント光がスクリーンなどの粗面の各点で散乱され、表面粗さによって生じる不規則な位相関係で干渉しあうことにより、不規則な粒状の強度分布として観測される現象である。照明光学系内に配置したスペックルノイズ低減素子を振動、揺動、又は回転させることで、スペックルノイズ低減素子から出射する各光線の位置及び位相が時間と共に変化する。これにより、スクリーン面における各点へ入射する各光線の角度及び位相が時間と共に変化するため、スペックルパターンが時間重畳され、視認されるスペックルノイズが低減される。 Speckle noise is observed as an irregular granular intensity distribution when coherent light such as laser light is scattered at each point on a rough surface such as a screen and interferes with an irregular phase relationship caused by the surface roughness. It is a phenomenon. By oscillating, swinging, or rotating the speckle noise reduction element arranged in the illumination optical system, the position and phase of each light beam emitted from the speckle noise reduction element changes with time. Thereby, since the angle and phase of each light ray incident on each point on the screen surface change with time, the speckle pattern is superimposed on time, and the speckle noise that is visually recognized is reduced.

 レンズ21Rは、赤成分光RがDMD500Rに照射されるように、赤成分光Rをリレーするリレーレンズである。レンズ21Gは、緑成分光GがDMD500Gに照射されるように、緑成分光Gをリレーするリレーレンズである。レンズ21Bは、青成分光BがDMD500Bに照射されるように、青成分光Bをリレーするリレーレンズである。 The lens 21R is a relay lens that relays the red component light R so that the red component light R is irradiated onto the DMD 500R. The lens 21G is a relay lens that relays the green component light G so that the DMD 500G is irradiated with the green component light G. The lens 21B is a relay lens that relays the blue component light B so that the blue component light B is irradiated onto the DMD 500B.

 レンズ22は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gの拡大を抑制しながら、DMD500R及びDMD500G上に赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを略結像するためのリレーレンズである。レンズ23は、青成分光Bの拡大を抑制しながら、青成分光BをDMD500Bに略結像するためのリレーレンズである。 The lens 22 is a relay lens for substantially imaging the red component light R and the green component light G on the DMD 500R and DMD 500G while suppressing the expansion of the red component light R and the green component light G. The lens 23 is a relay lens for substantially imaging the blue component light B on the DMD 500B while suppressing the expansion of the blue component light B.

 ミラー31は、ロッドインテグレータ10Rから出射された赤成分光Rを反射する。ミラー32は、ロッドインテグレータ10Gから出射された緑成分光Gを反射して、赤成分光Rを透過するダイクロイックミラーである。ミラー33は、ロッドインテグレータ10Bから出射された青成分光Bを透過して、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを反射するダイクロイックミラーである。 The mirror 31 reflects the red component light R emitted from the rod integrator 10R. The mirror 32 is a dichroic mirror that reflects the green component light G emitted from the rod integrator 10G and transmits the red component light R. The mirror 33 is a dichroic mirror that transmits the blue component light B emitted from the rod integrator 10B and reflects the red component light R and the green component light G.

 ミラー34は、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを反射する。ミラー35は、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを第2ユニット142側に反射する。なお、図33では、説明を簡易にするために、各構成が平面図で示されているが、ミラー35は、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを高さ方向において斜めに反射する。 Mirror 34 reflects red component light R, green component light G, and blue component light B. The mirror 35 reflects the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B to the second unit 142 side. In FIG. 33, each component is shown in a plan view for the sake of simplicity. However, the mirror 35 obliquely reflects the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B in the height direction. Reflect on.

 第2ユニット142は、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを含む合成光を分離して、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを変調する。第2ユニット142は、続いて、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを再合成して、映像光を投写ユニット150側に出射する。 The second unit 142 separates the combined light including the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and modulates the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B. Subsequently, the second unit 142 recombines the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B, and emits image light to the projection unit 150 side.

 具体的には、第2ユニット142は、レンズ40と、プリズム50と、プリズム60と、プリズム70と、プリズム80と、プリズム90と、複数のDMD;Digital Micromirror Device(DMD500R、DMD500G及びDMD500B)とを有する。 Specifically, the second unit 142 includes a lens 40, a prism 50, a prism 60, a prism 70, a prism 80, a prism 90, and a plurality of DMDs; Digital Micromirror Device (DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B). Have

 レンズ40は、各色成分光が各DMDに照射されるように、第1ユニット141から出射された光をリレーするリレーレンズである。 The lens 40 is a relay lens that relays the light emitted from the first unit 141 so that each color component light is irradiated to each DMD.

 プリズム50は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面51及び面52を有する。プリズム50(面51)とプリズム60(面61)との間にはエアギャップが設けられており、第1ユニット141から出射される光が面51に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも大きいため、第1ユニット141から出射される光は面51で反射される。一方で、プリズム50(面52)とプリズム70(面71)との間にはエアギャップが設けられるが、第1ユニット141から出射される光が面52に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも小さいため、面51で反射された光は面52を透過する。 The prism 50 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 51 and a surface 52. An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 51) and the prism 60 (surface 61), and the angle (incident angle) at which the light emitted from the first unit 141 enters the surface 51 is the total reflection angle. Therefore, the light emitted from the first unit 141 is reflected by the surface 51. On the other hand, an air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), but the angle at which the light emitted from the first unit 141 enters the surface 52 (incident angle) is all. Since it is smaller than the reflection angle, the light reflected by the surface 51 passes through the surface 52.

 プリズム60は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面61を有する。 The prism 60 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 61.

 プリズム70は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面71及び面72を有する。プリズム50(面52)とプリズム70(面71)との間にはエアギャップが設けられており、面72で反射された青成分光B及びDMD500Bから出射された青成分光Bが面71に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも大きいため、面72で反射された青成分光B及びDMD500Bから出射された青成分光Bは面71で反射される。 The prism 70 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 71 and a surface 72. An air gap is provided between the prism 50 (surface 52) and the prism 70 (surface 71), and the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are formed on the surface 71. Since the incident angle (incident angle) is larger than the total reflection angle, the blue component light B reflected by the surface 72 and the blue component light B emitted from the DMD 500B are reflected by the surface 71.

 面72は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを透過して、青成分光Bを反射するダイクロイックミラー面である。従って、面51で反射された光のうち、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gは面72を透過し、青成分光Bは面72で反射される。面71で反射された青成分光Bは面72で反射される。 The surface 72 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the red component light R and the green component light G and reflects the blue component light B. Accordingly, among the light reflected by the surface 51, the red component light R and the green component light G are transmitted through the surface 72, and the blue component light B is reflected by the surface 72. The blue component light B reflected by the surface 71 is reflected by the surface 72.

 プリズム80は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面81及び面82を有する。プリズム70(面72)とプリズム80(面81)との間にはエアギャップが設けられており、面81を透過して面82で反射された赤成分光R及びDMD500Rから出射された赤成分光Rが再び面81に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも大きいため、面81を透過して面82で反射された赤成分光R及びDMD500Rから出射された赤成分光Rは面81で反射される。一方で、DMD500Rから出射されて面81で反射された後に面82で反射された赤成分光Rが再び面81に入射する角度(入射角)が全反射角よりも小さいため、DMD500Rから出射されて面81で反射された後に面82で反射された赤成分光Rは面81を透過する。 The prism 80 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 81 and a surface 82. An air gap is provided between the prism 70 (surface 72) and the prism 80 (surface 81). The red component light R transmitted through the surface 81 and reflected by the surface 82 and the red component emitted from the DMD 500R. Since the angle (incident angle) at which the light R again enters the surface 81 is larger than the total reflection angle, the red component light R transmitted through the surface 81 and reflected by the surface 82 and the red component light R emitted from the DMD 500R are Reflected by the surface 81. On the other hand, since the angle (incident angle) at which the red component light R emitted from the DMD 500R and reflected by the surface 81 and then reflected by the surface 82 is incident on the surface 81 again is smaller than the total reflection angle, it is emitted from the DMD 500R. Then, the red component light R reflected by the surface 82 after being reflected by the surface 81 passes through the surface 81.

 面82は、緑成分光Gを透過して、赤成分光Rを反射するダイクロイックミラー面である。従って、面81を透過した光のうち、緑成分光Gは面82を透過し、赤成分光Rは面82で反射される。面81で反射された赤成分光Rは面82で反射される。DMD500Gから出射された緑成分光Gは面82を透過する。 The surface 82 is a dichroic mirror surface that transmits the green component light G and reflects the red component light R. Accordingly, among the light transmitted through the surface 81, the green component light G is transmitted through the surface 82, and the red component light R is reflected by the surface 82. The red component light R reflected by the surface 81 is reflected by the surface 82. The green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G passes through the surface 82.

 ここで、プリズム70は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを含む合成光と青成分光Bとを面72によって分離する。プリズム80は、赤成分光Rと緑成分光Gとを面82によって分離する。すなわち、プリズム70及びプリズム80は、各色成分光を分離する色分離素子として機能する。 Here, the prism 70 separates the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B by the surface 72. The prism 80 separates the red component light R and the green component light G by the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color separation element that separates each color component light.

 なお、第3実施形態では、プリズム70の面72のカットオフ波長は、緑色に相当する波長帯と青色に相当する波長帯との間に設けられる。プリズム80の面82のカットオフ波長は、赤色に相当する波長帯と緑色に相当する波長帯との間に設けられる。 In the third embodiment, the cutoff wavelength of the surface 72 of the prism 70 is provided between the wavelength band corresponding to green and the wavelength band corresponding to blue. The cut-off wavelength of the surface 82 of the prism 80 is provided between a wavelength band corresponding to red and a wavelength band corresponding to green.

 一方で、プリズム70は、赤成分光R及び緑成分光Gを含む合成光と青成分光Bとを面72によって合成する。プリズム80は、赤成分光Rと緑成分光Gとを面82によって合成する。すなわち、プリズム70及びプリズム80は、各色成分光を合成する色合成素子として機能する。 On the other hand, the prism 70 combines the combined light including the red component light R and the green component light G and the blue component light B with the surface 72. The prism 80 combines the red component light R and the green component light G with the surface 82. That is, the prism 70 and the prism 80 function as a color composition element that synthesizes each color component light.

 プリズム90は、透光性部材によって構成されており、面91を有する。面91は、緑成分光Gを透過するように構成されている。なお、DMD500Gへ入射する緑成分光G及びDMD500Gから出射された緑成分光Gは面91を透過する。 The prism 90 is made of a translucent member and has a surface 91. The surface 91 is configured to transmit the green component light G. The green component light G incident on the DMD 500G and the green component light G emitted from the DMD 500G pass through the surface 91.

 DMD500R、DMD500G及びDMD500Bは、複数の微少ミラーによって構成されており、複数の微少ミラーは可動式である。各微少ミラーは、基本的に1画素に相当する。DMD500Rは、各微少ミラーの角度を変更することによって、投写ユニット150側に赤成分光Rを反射するか否かを切り替える。同様に、DMD500G及びDMD500Bは、各微少ミラーの角度を変更することによって、投写ユニット150側に緑成分光G及び青成分光Bを反射するか否かを切り替える。 DMD500R, DMD500G, and DMD500B are configured by a plurality of micromirrors, and the plurality of micromirrors are movable. Each minute mirror basically corresponds to one pixel. The DMD 500R switches whether to reflect the red component light R toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror. Similarly, the DMD 500G and the DMD 500B switch whether to reflect the green component light G and the blue component light B toward the projection unit 150 by changing the angle of each micromirror.

 投写ユニット150は、投写レンズ群151と、凹面ミラー152とを有する。 The projection unit 150 includes a projection lens group 151 and a concave mirror 152.

 投写レンズ群151は、色分離合成ユニット140から出射された光(映像光)を凹面ミラー152側に出射する。 The projection lens group 151 emits light (image light) emitted from the color separation / synthesis unit 140 to the concave mirror 152 side.

 凹面ミラー152は、投写レンズ群151から出射された光(映像光)を反射する。凹面ミラー152は、映像光を集光した上で、映像光を広角化する。例えば、凹面ミラー152は、投写レンズ群151側に凹面を有する非球面ミラーである。 The concave mirror 152 reflects light (image light) emitted from the projection lens group 151. The concave mirror 152 condenses the image light and then widens the image light. For example, the concave mirror 152 is an aspherical mirror having a concave surface on the projection lens group 151 side.

 凹面ミラー152で集光された映像光は、天板240に設けられた天板凹部180の傾斜面181に設けられた透過領域を透過する。傾斜面181に設けられた透過領域は、凹面ミラー152によって映像光が集光される位置近傍に設けられることが好ましい。 The image light collected by the concave mirror 152 passes through a transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 of the top plate recess 180 provided on the top plate 240. The transmission region provided on the inclined surface 181 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the position where the image light is collected by the concave mirror 152.

 凹面ミラー152は、上述したように、前面側凸部170によって形成される空間に収容される。例えば、凹面ミラー152は、前面側凸部170の内側に固定されることが好ましい。また、前面側凸部170の内側面の形状は、凹面ミラー152に沿った形状であることが好ましい。 The concave mirror 152 is accommodated in the space formed by the front-side convex portion 170 as described above. For example, the concave mirror 152 is preferably fixed inside the front side convex portion 170. In addition, the shape of the inner surface of the front side convex portion 170 is preferably a shape along the concave mirror 152.

 (スペックルノイズ低減素子の基本構成)
 図34は、スペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bを詳細に記載したものである。スペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bは、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310、素子基板320、出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312、及び図示しない振動付与手段を備える。
(Basic configuration of speckle noise reduction element)
FIG. 34 shows the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B in detail. The speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B include an incident side microlens array 310, an element substrate 320, an emission side microlens array 312, and vibration applying means (not shown).

 入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310は、スペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bの光の入射面側に無数に形成された半球状のマイクロレンズの集合体である。入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310の個々のレンズは、屈折率がn、焦点距離がfのマイクロレンズである。 The incident side microlens array 310 is an aggregate of hemispherical microlenses formed innumerably on the light incident surface side of the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B. is there. Each lens of the incident side microlens array 310 is a microlens having a refractive index of n and a focal length of f.

 素子基板320は、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310と出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312を紫外線硬化型の接着剤で固着している。素子基板320は、屈折率n、厚みWの透明基板である。なお、素子基板320の厚みWは、“2f/n”±“誤差”である。言い換えると、素子基板320の厚みWは、厳密に“2f/n”と同じではなくてもよく、略“2f/n”であればよい。 The element substrate 320 has the incident side microlens array 310 and the emission side microlens array 312 fixed with an ultraviolet curing adhesive. The element substrate 320 is a transparent substrate having a refractive index n and a thickness W. Note that the thickness W of the element substrate 320 is “2f / n” ± “error”. In other words, the thickness W of the element substrate 320 may not be strictly the same as “2f / n”, and may be approximately “2f / n”.

 出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312は、スペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bの光の出射面側に無数に形成された半球状のマイクロレンズの集合体である。出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312の個々のレンズは、屈折率がn、焦点距離がfのマイクロレンズである。 The emission side microlens array 312 is an aggregate of hemispherical microlenses formed innumerably on the light emission surface side of the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B. is there. Each lens of the exit side microlens array 312 is a microlens having a refractive index n and a focal length f.

 尚、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310、素子基板320、及び出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312を紫外線硬化型の接着剤で固着したがそれに限るものではなく、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310、素子基板320、及び出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312を一体成型で形成しても良いものである。このようにすることにより、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310、素子基板320、及び出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312を張り合わせる手間や光軸調整等の作業が不要となる。 The incident side microlens array 310, the element substrate 320, and the emission side microlens array 312 are fixed with an ultraviolet curable adhesive, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The side microlens array 312 may be formed by integral molding. By doing so, it is not necessary to attach the incident side microlens array 310, the element substrate 320, and the emission side microlens array 312 or to adjust the optical axis.

 次に図34を用いてスペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bを進む光の光路を説明する。ロッドインテグレータ10R、ロッドインテグレータ10G、及びロッドインテグレータ10Bの出射端面から出射した光は、距離2f離れた入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310に入射する。入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310に入射した光は、屈折し入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310と素子基板320の内部を通過する。尚、屈折は入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310の入射面でのみ発生し、屈折率が同じである入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310と素子基板320の境界面では屈折は発生しない。 Next, the optical path of light traveling through the speckle noise reducing element 20R, the speckle noise reducing element 20G, and the speckle noise reducing element 20B will be described with reference to FIG. Light emitted from the emission end faces of the rod integrator 10R, rod integrator 10G, and rod integrator 10B is incident on the incident side microlens array 310 that is separated by a distance 2f. The light incident on the incident side microlens array 310 is refracted and passes through the inside of the incident side microlens array 310 and the element substrate 320. Refraction occurs only on the incident surface of the incident side microlens array 310, and no refraction occurs on the boundary surface between the incident side microlens array 310 and the element substrate 320 having the same refractive index.

 素子基板320の厚みが略2f/nであるため、素子基板320の内部を通過した光は、素子基板320の出射側に固着されている出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312で結像する。 Since the thickness of the element substrate 320 is approximately 2 f / n, the light that has passed through the element substrate 320 is imaged by the emission-side microlens array 312 fixed to the emission side of the element substrate 320.

 出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312の焦点距離がfで入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310と同一であるため、入射側発散角θと出射側発散角ηは同一になる。 Since the focal length of the exit side microlens array 312 is f and is the same as that of the entrance side microlens array 310, the entrance side divergence angle θ and the exit side divergence angle η are the same.

 上述のように、入射側発散角θに対して出射側発散角ηが同一であるため、投写レンズ151に取り込めない角度の光が発生しにくく、投写映像に用いる光損失が発生しにくい。 As described above, since the exit-side divergence angle η is the same as the incident-side divergence angle θ, it is difficult to generate light at an angle that cannot be taken into the projection lens 151, and light loss used for the projected image is unlikely to occur.

 次にスペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bを振動、揺動、又は回転させることで入射する光の光路長が時間と共に変化しスペックルノイズ低減素子から出射する光の出射位置および位相が時間と共に変化する現象を図35の(a)(b)(c)を用いて説明する。 Next, the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B are vibrated, oscillated, or rotated, so that the optical path length of incident light changes with time, and the speckle noise reduction element. A phenomenon in which the emission position and phase of the light emitted from the light changes with time will be described with reference to FIGS.

 図35の(a)は、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310と出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312の一対のマイクロレンズに着目して示した図である。 FIG. 35 (a) is a view focusing on a pair of microlenses of the incident side microlens array 310 and the emission side microlens array 312. FIG.

 ロッドインテグレータ10R、ロッドインテグレータ10G、及びロッドインテグレータ10Bの出射端面から出射した光は、距離2f離れた入射側マイクロレンズ311に入射する。入射側マイクロレンズ311に入射した光は、屈折し入射側マイクロレンズ311と素子基板320の内部を通過する。尚、屈折は入射側マイクロレンズ311の入射面でのみ発生し、屈折率が同じである入射側マイクロレンズ311と素子基板320の境界面では屈折は発生しない。 The light emitted from the emission end faces of the rod integrator 10R, the rod integrator 10G, and the rod integrator 10B is incident on the incident-side microlens 311 that is separated by a distance 2f. The light incident on the incident side microlens 311 is refracted and passes through the inside of the incident side microlens 311 and the element substrate 320. Refraction occurs only on the incident surface of the incident side microlens 311, and no refraction occurs on the boundary surface between the incident side microlens 311 and the element substrate 320 having the same refractive index.

 素子基板320の厚みが略2f/nであるため、素子基板320の内部を通過した光は、素子基板320の出射側に固着されている出射側マイクロレンズ313の中央で結像する。 Since the thickness of the element substrate 320 is approximately 2 f / n, the light passing through the element substrate 320 forms an image at the center of the emission side microlens 313 fixed to the emission side of the element substrate 320.

 図35の(b)は、図35の(a)に対してスペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bが振動により上方に移動した際の光の光路を示した図である。 FIG. 35B shows an optical path of light when the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B move upward due to vibration with respect to FIG. FIG.

 図35の(c)は、図35の(a)に対してスペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bが振動により下方に移動した際の光の光路を示した図である。 FIG. 35C shows the optical path of light when the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B move downward due to vibration with respect to FIG. FIG.

 例えば、スペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bが上下に振動すると出射側マイクロレンズの出射光の出射する位置が図35の(a)(b)(c)では異なる。また、スペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bが上下に振動すると図35の(a)(b)(c)のそれぞれ異なった光路長を通った光が結像することになる。従って、出射側マイクロレンズから出射する光は、位相が異なった光としてスペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bから出射されることになる。 For example, when the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B vibrate up and down, the positions where the emission light of the emission side microlens is emitted are shown in FIGS. c) is different. Further, when the speckle noise reducing element 20R, the speckle noise reducing element 20G, and the speckle noise reducing element 20B vibrate up and down, the light passing through the different optical path lengths shown in FIGS. 35 (a), (b), and (c). Will be imaged. Therefore, the light emitted from the emission side microlens is emitted from the speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B as light having different phases.

 このことにより、スクリーン面における各点へ入射する各光線の角度及び位相が時間と共に変化するため、スペックルパターンが時間重畳され、視認されるスペックルノイズが低減される。 As a result, the angle and phase of each light ray incident on each point on the screen surface change with time, so that the speckle pattern is superimposed on time and the visible speckle noise is reduced.

 (スペックルノイズ低減素子の応用構成)
 次に図34に戻り、スペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bのマイクロレンズに関して詳述する。スペックルノイズ低減素子20R、スペックルノイズ低減素子20G、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子20Bは2fの距離から出射された光全てが入射側発散角θ以内であれば入射された光全てを出射側発散角η以内で出射することできる。すなわち、入射側マイクロレンズ311及び出射側マイクロレンズ313の直径をdとすると以下の条件が成り立つときに入射側発散角θ、出射側発散角ηの関係がθ=ηとなる。

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002
(Application configuration of speckle noise reduction element)
Next, returning to FIG. 34, the microlenses of the speckle noise reducing element 20R, the speckle noise reducing element 20G, and the speckle noise reducing element 20B will be described in detail. The speckle noise reduction element 20R, the speckle noise reduction element 20G, and the speckle noise reduction element 20B emit all the incident light when the light emitted from the distance of 2f is within the incident side divergence angle θ. The light can be emitted within an angle η. That is, assuming that the diameters of the incident side microlens 311 and the emission side microlens 313 are d, the relationship between the incident side divergence angle θ and the emission side divergence angle η is θ = η when the following conditions are satisfied.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002

 上記条件により、入射側マイクロレンズ311及び出射側マイクロレンズ313の直径を設計すれば、上記スペックルノイズ低減素子の基本構成のときよりも入射側発散角θに対して出射側発散角ηが同一となり、投写レンズに取り込めない角度の光が発生しにくく、投写映像に用いる光損失が発生しにくい。 If the diameters of the incident-side microlens 311 and the emission-side microlens 313 are designed according to the above conditions, the emission-side divergence angle η is the same as the incident-side divergence angle θ compared to the basic configuration of the speckle noise reduction element. Therefore, it is difficult to generate light at an angle that cannot be captured by the projection lens, and it is difficult to cause light loss used in a projected image.

 尚、上記実施形態では、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310と出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312の間には素子基板320を配した構成としたがこの構成に限るものではなく、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310と出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312を独立して配し、それぞれの距離を2f離しても良いものとする。 In the above embodiment, the element substrate 320 is disposed between the incident-side microlens array 310 and the emission-side microlens array 312, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the incident-side microlens array 310 and the emission-side microlens array 310 are arranged. The side microlens array 312 may be arranged independently, and each distance may be separated by 2f.

 [変更例1]
 以下において、第3実施形態の変更例1について、図面を参照しながら説明する。以下においては、第3実施形態との相違点について主として説明する。
[Modification 1]
Hereinafter, Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following, differences from the third embodiment will be mainly described.

 具体的には、第3実施形態では、光源ユニット110は、赤コヒーレント光源111R、緑コヒーレント光源111G及び青コヒーレント光源111Bを有しており、色分離合成ユニット140は、ロッドインテグレータ10R、ロッドインテグレータ10G及びロッドインテグレータ10Bを有し、スクリーン面の略共役な面になるロッドインテグレータ10R、ロッドインテグレータ10G及びロッドインテグレータ10Bの光出射面の直前にスペックルノイズ低減素子R20、スペックルノイズ低減素子G20、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子B20を配した。 Specifically, in the third embodiment, the light source unit 110 includes a red coherent light source 111R, a green coherent light source 111G, and a blue coherent light source 111B, and the color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes the rod integrator 10R and the rod integrator 10G. And a rod integrator 10R, a rod integrator 10R that becomes a substantially conjugate plane of the screen surface, a speckle noise reduction element R20, a speckle noise reduction element G20, immediately before the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10G and the rod integrator 10B, and A speckle noise reduction element B20 was arranged.

 これに対して、変更例1では、光源ユニット110は、白色のコヒーレント光源を有しており、色分離合成ユニット140には、単数のロッドインテグレータ10Wを有し、スクリーン面の略共役な面になるロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射面の直前にスペックルノイズ低減素子W20を配した。 On the other hand, in the first modification, the light source unit 110 has a white coherent light source, and the color separation / synthesis unit 140 has a single rod integrator 10 </ b> W on a substantially conjugate surface of the screen surface. A speckle noise reduction element W20 is disposed immediately before the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10W.

 [変更例2]
 以下において、第3実施形態の変更例1について、図面を参照しながら説明する。以下においては、第3実施形態との相違点について主として説明する。
[Modification 2]
Hereinafter, Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following, differences from the third embodiment will be mainly described.

 具体的には、第3実施形態では、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310と出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312が同じ焦点距離fを有するものとして説明した。変形例2では、出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312の焦点距離が入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310の焦点距離fと異なる(焦点距離f’となる)場合について説明する。 Specifically, in the third embodiment, the incident side microlens array 310 and the emission side microlens array 312 are described as having the same focal length f. In Modification 2, a case will be described in which the focal length of the exit-side microlens array 312 is different from the focal length f of the incident-side microlens array 310 (the focal length is f ′).

 入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310に入射した光は、屈折し入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310と素子基板320の内部を通過する。素子基板320の内部を通過した光は、出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312の焦点距離がf’であるため、素子基板320の厚みは略(f+f’)/nとすると、素子基板320の出射側に固着されている出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312で結像する。 The light incident on the incident side microlens array 310 is refracted and passes through the inside of the incident side microlens array 310 and the element substrate 320. The light that has passed through the inside of the element substrate 320 has a focal length f ′ of the emission-side microlens array 312, so that if the thickness of the element substrate 320 is approximately (f + f ′) / n, An image is formed by the fixed exit side microlens array 312.

 ここで焦点距離f及び焦点距離f’の関係は、f≦f’を満たす。このようにすることにより、入射側発散角θ及び出射側発散角ηの関係は、θ≧ηを満たす。従って、投写レンズ151に取り込めない角度の光が発生しにくく、投写映像に用いる光損失が発生しにくい。 Here, the relationship between the focal length f and the focal length f ′ satisfies f ≦ f ′. By doing so, the relationship between the incident-side divergence angle θ and the emission-side divergence angle η satisfies θ ≧ η. Therefore, light at an angle that cannot be captured by the projection lens 151 is unlikely to be generated, and light loss used for the projected image is unlikely to occur.

 また、入射側マイクロレンズアレイ310がn個×m個のマイクロレンズから構成される場合、出射側マイクロレンズアレイ312もn個×m個のマイクロレンズから構成される必要がある。 When the incident side microlens array 310 is composed of n × m microlenses, the exit side microlens array 312 needs to be composed of n × m microlenses.

 (色分離合成ユニット及び投写ユニットの構成)
 以下において、変更例1に係る色分離合成ユニット及び投写ユニットの構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図35は、変更例1に係る色分離合成ユニット140及び投写ユニット150を示す図である。図35では、図33と同様の構成について同様の符号を付している。
(Configuration of color separation / synthesis unit and projection unit)
Hereinafter, configurations of the color separation / synthesis unit and the projection unit according to Modification 1 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating the color separation / synthesis unit 140 and the projection unit 150 according to the first modification. 35, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure similar to FIG.

 図35に示すように、スペックルノイズ低減素子R20、スペックルノイズ低減素子G20、及びスペックルノイズ低減素子B20に代えて、スペックル低減素子W20を有する。また、色分離合成ユニット140は、ロッドインテグレータ10R、ロッドインテグレータ10G及びロッドインテグレータ10Bに代えて、ロッドインテグレータ10Wを有する。また、色分離合成ユニット140は、レンズ21R、レンズ21G及びレンズ21Bに代えて、レンズ21Wを有する。 As shown in FIG. 35, a speckle reduction element W20 is provided instead of the speckle noise reduction element R20, the speckle noise reduction element G20, and the speckle noise reduction element B20. The color separation / synthesis unit 140 includes a rod integrator 10W instead of the rod integrator 10R, the rod integrator 10G, and the rod integrator 10B. The color separation / combination unit 140 includes a lens 21W instead of the lens 21R, the lens 21G, and the lens 21B.

 ロッドインテグレータ10Wには、バンドル部114Wから白色光が入射する。ここで、バンドル部114Wから白色光が出射されることに留意すべきである。 White light is incident on the rod integrator 10W from the bundle portion 114W. Here, it should be noted that white light is emitted from the bundle unit 114W.

 例えば、バンドル部114Wは、光源(LDなど)から出射される白色光を伝達する光ファイバを束ねてもよい。このようなケースでは、複数のコヒーレント光源として、白色光を出射する複数のコヒーレント光源が設けられる。 For example, the bundle unit 114W may bundle optical fibers that transmit white light emitted from a light source (LD or the like). In such a case, a plurality of coherent light sources that emit white light are provided as the plurality of coherent light sources.

 また、バンドル部114Wは、光ファイバ113R、光ファイバ113G及び光ファイバ113Bを束ねてもよい。このようなケースでは、第3実施形態と同様に、複数のコヒーレント光源として、赤コヒーレント光源111R、緑コヒーレント光源111G及び青コヒーレント光源111Bが設けられる。 Further, the bundle unit 114W may bundle the optical fiber 113R, the optical fiber 113G, and the optical fiber 113B. In such a case, as in the third embodiment, a red coherent light source 111R, a green coherent light source 111G, and a blue coherent light source 111B are provided as a plurality of coherent light sources.

 レンズ21Wは、白色光が各DMD500に照射されるように、白色光をリレーするリレーレンズである。 The lens 21 </ b> W is a relay lens that relays white light so that each DMD 500 is irradiated with white light.

 [第4実施形態]
 以下において、第4実施形態について、図面を参照しながら説明する。以下においては、第3実施形態との相違点について主として説明する。
[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following, differences from the third embodiment will be mainly described.

 具体的には、第3実施形態では、投写型映像表示装置100が壁面に設けられた投写面300に映像光を投写するケースについて例示した。これに対して、第4実施形態では、投写型映像表示装置100が床面に設けられた投写面300に映像光を投写するケースについて例示する(床面投写)。このようなケースにおける筐体200の配置を床面投写配置と称する。 Specifically, in the third embodiment, the case where the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto the projection plane 300 provided on the wall surface is illustrated. In contrast, the fourth embodiment exemplifies a case in which the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto a projection plane 300 provided on the floor (floor projection). The arrangement of the casing 200 in such a case is referred to as a floor projection arrangement.

 (投写型映像表示装置の構成)
 以下において、第4実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置の構成について、図面を参照しながら説明する。図36は、第4実施形態に係る投写型映像表示装置100を側方から見た図である。
(Configuration of projection display device)
The configuration of the projection display apparatus according to the fourth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 36 is a side view of the projection display apparatus 100 according to the fourth embodiment.

 図36に示すように、投写型映像表示装置100は、床面に設けられた投写面300に映像光を投写する(床面投写)。第4実施形態では、投写面300と略平行な第1配置面は床面410である。第1配置面に略垂直な第2配置面は壁面420である。 As shown in FIG. 36, the projection display apparatus 100 projects image light onto a projection plane 300 provided on the floor (floor projection). In the fourth embodiment, the first arrangement surface that is substantially parallel to the projection surface 300 is the floor surface 410. A second arrangement surface that is substantially perpendicular to the first arrangement surface is a wall surface 420.

 第4実施形態では、投写面300に平行な水平方向を“幅方向”と称する。投写面300の法線方向を“高さ方向”と称する。幅方向及び高さ方向の双方に直交する方向を“奥行き方向”と称する。 In the fourth embodiment, a horizontal direction parallel to the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “width direction”. The normal direction of the projection plane 300 is referred to as a “height direction”. A direction orthogonal to both the width direction and the height direction is referred to as a “depth direction”.

 第4実施形態では、筐体200は、第3実施形態と同様に、略直方体形状を有する。奥行き方向における筐体200のサイズ及び高さ方向における筐体200のサイズは、幅方向における筐体200のサイズよりも小さい。高さ方向における筐体200のサイズは、反射ミラー(図30に示す凹面ミラー152)から投写面300までの投写距離と略等しい。幅方向において、筐体200のサイズは、投写面300のサイズと略等しい。奥行き方向において、筐体200のサイズは、壁面420から投写面300までの距離に応じて定められる。 In the fourth embodiment, the housing 200 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape as in the third embodiment. The size of the housing 200 in the depth direction and the size of the housing 200 in the height direction are smaller than the size of the housing 200 in the width direction. The size of the housing 200 in the height direction is substantially equal to the projection distance from the reflection mirror (concave mirror 152 shown in FIG. 30) to the projection plane 300. In the width direction, the size of the casing 200 is substantially equal to the size of the projection plane 300. In the depth direction, the size of the casing 200 is determined according to the distance from the wall surface 420 to the projection plane 300.

 投写面側側壁210は、投写面300と略平行な第1配置面(第4実施形態では、床面410)と対向する板状の部材である。前面側側壁220は、投写面側側壁210の反対側に設けられた板状の部材である。天板240は、底面板230の反対側に設けられた板状の部材である。底面板230は、投写面300と略平行な第1配置面以外の第2配置面(第4実施形態では、壁面420)と対向する板状の部材である。第1側面側側壁250及び第2側面側側壁260は、幅方向において筐体200の両端を形成する板状の部材である。尚、第4実施形態では、赤コヒーレント光源、緑コヒーレント光源、及び青コヒーレント光源を用いても白コヒーレント光源を用いても良いものとする。 The projection surface side wall 210 is a plate-like member facing a first arrangement surface (in the fourth embodiment, the floor surface 410) substantially parallel to the projection surface 300. The front side wall 220 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the projection plane side wall 210. The top plate 240 is a plate-like member provided on the opposite side of the bottom plate 230. The bottom plate 230 is a plate-like member that faces a second arrangement surface (in the fourth embodiment, a wall surface 420) other than the first arrangement surface substantially parallel to the projection plane 300. The first side wall 250 and the second side wall 260 are plate-like members that form both ends of the housing 200 in the width direction. In the fourth embodiment, a red coherent light source, a green coherent light source, a blue coherent light source, or a white coherent light source may be used.

 [その他の実施形態]
 上記のように、本発明は実施形態によって記載したが、この開示の一部をなす論述及び図面はこの発明を限定するものであると理解すべきではない。この開示から当業者には様々な代替実施形態、実施例及び運用技術が明らかとなる。
[Other Embodiments]
As mentioned above, although this invention was described by embodiment, it should not be understood that the description and drawing which form a part of this indication limit this invention. From this disclosure, various alternative embodiments, examples and operational techniques will be apparent to those skilled in the art.

 実施形態では、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光路上に設けられる拡散面が1つ或いは2つであるケースにして例示した。しかしながら、光源ユニット110から出射される光の光路上に設けられる3つの拡散面が設けられていてもよい。このようなケースでは、3つの拡散面のうち、少なくとも2つの拡散面が振動していればよい。 In the embodiment, the case where the number of diffusion surfaces provided on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110 is one or two is illustrated. However, three diffusion surfaces provided on the optical path of the light emitted from the light source unit 110 may be provided. In such a case, it is only necessary that at least two of the three diffusion surfaces vibrate.

 実施形態では、光源ユニット110が白色光Wを出射する固体光源111Wを有するケースについて例示した。しかしながら、実施形態は、これに限定されるものではない。光源ユニット110が赤成分光Rを出射する赤固体光源、緑成分光Gを出射する緑固体光源及び青成分光Bを出射する青固体光源を有していてもよい。このようなケースでは、赤成分光R、緑成分光G及び青成分光Bのそれぞれの光路上に、拡散光学素子600が配置される。 In the embodiment, the case where the light source unit 110 includes the solid light source 111W that emits the white light W is illustrated. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The light source unit 110 may include a red solid light source that emits red component light R, a green solid light source that emits green component light G, and a blue solid light source that emits blue component light B. In such a case, the diffusion optical element 600 is disposed on each optical path of the red component light R, the green component light G, and the blue component light B.

 実施形態では、DLP方式(登録商標)に対応する投写型映像表示装置100について例示した。また、実施形態では、壁面投写を行う投写型映像表示装置100について例示した。しかしながら、実施形態は、可干渉性を有する光を出射する光源が用いられる投写型映像表示装置であれば、どのような投写型映像表示装置にも適用可能である。 In the embodiment, the projection display apparatus 100 corresponding to the DLP method (registered trademark) is exemplified. Further, in the embodiment, the projection display apparatus 100 that performs wall surface projection is illustrated. However, the embodiment can be applied to any projection video display apparatus that uses a light source that emits coherent light.

 第1実施形態では、スクリーンと視聴者との距離に応じてモードを選択するケースについて例示した。しかしながら、実施形態は、これに限定されるものではない。投写画像の大きさ(ズームの程度)や輝度、スクリーンの種類などを検出して、スクリーンと視聴者との距離及び検出結果に応じて、モードを選択してもよい。 In the first embodiment, the case where the mode is selected according to the distance between the screen and the viewer is illustrated. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The mode may be selected in accordance with the distance between the screen and the viewer and the detection result by detecting the size of the projected image (degree of zoom), brightness, screen type, and the like.

 第2実施形態では、拡散光学素子600は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射側に設けられる。しかしながら、実施形態は、これに限定されるものではない。例えば、拡散光学素子600は、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光入射側に設けられてもよい。 In the second embodiment, the diffusing optical element 600 is provided on the light exit side of the rod integrator 10W. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the diffusion optical element 600 may be provided on the light incident side of the rod integrator 10W.

 第2実施形態では、均一化光学素子の一例として、拡散光学素子600について例示した。しかしながら、実施形態は、これに限定されるものではない。均一化光学素子は、投写ユニットの射出瞳面における光強度の空間分布を均一化する光学素子であれば、どのような光学素子であってもよい。例えば、均一化光学素子は、回折格子やマイクロレンズアレイであってもよい。回折格子については、投写ユニットの射出瞳面における光強度の空間分布が均一化されるように、回折格子の回折パターン(凹凸パターン)が設計される。マイクロレンズアレイについては、中心領域のレンズの曲率半径(R)が周辺領域のレンズの曲率半径(R)よりも小さくなるようにマイクロレンズアレイが設計される。すなわち、中心領域のレンズの曲率半径(R)が小さいため、光の拡散度が大きくなり、周辺領域のレンズの曲率半径が大きいため、光の拡散度が小さくなる。 In the second embodiment, the diffusion optical element 600 is illustrated as an example of the uniformizing optical element. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The homogenizing optical element may be any optical element as long as it makes the spatial distribution of light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit uniform. For example, the homogenizing optical element may be a diffraction grating or a microlens array. Regarding the diffraction grating, the diffraction pattern (unevenness pattern) of the diffraction grating is designed so that the spatial distribution of the light intensity on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit is made uniform. Regarding the microlens array, the microlens array is designed such that the radius of curvature (R) of the lens in the central region is smaller than the radius of curvature (R) of the lens in the peripheral region. That is, since the radius of curvature (R) of the lens in the central region is small, the light diffusivity increases, and since the radius of curvature of the lens in the peripheral region is large, the light diffusivity decreases.

 第2実施形態では、拡散光学素子600が中心領域及び周辺領域を有するケースについて例示した。しかしながら、実施形態では、これに限定されるものではない。拡散光学素子600の拡散度の分布は、投写ユニットの射出瞳面における光強度の空間分布を均一化するように設計されてもよい。例えば、拡散光学素子600の拡散度は、中心から外側に向けて徐々に小さくなっていてもよい。 In the second embodiment, the case where the diffusion optical element 600 has a central region and a peripheral region is illustrated. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. The diffusivity distribution of the diffusing optical element 600 may be designed to make the spatial distribution of the light intensity uniform on the exit pupil plane of the projection unit. For example, the diffusivity of the diffusion optical element 600 may gradually decrease from the center toward the outside.

 また、光源から出射される光の強度が大きい領域(例えば、最大強度の1/2よりも大きい領域)を中心領域として、光源から出射される光の強度が小さい領域(例えば、最大強度の1/2よりも小さい領域)を周辺領域としてもよい。中心領域のサイズは、ロッドインテグレータ10Wの光出射面のサイズよりも小さいことが好ましい。 Further, an area where the intensity of the light emitted from the light source is small (for example, 1 of the maximum intensity), with the area where the intensity of the light emitted from the light source is large (for example, an area larger than ½ of the maximum intensity) as the central area. A region smaller than / 2) may be set as the peripheral region. The size of the central region is preferably smaller than the size of the light exit surface of the rod integrator 10W.

 第3実施形態では、筐体200が配置される壁面420上に投写面300が設けられるが、実施形態はこれに限定されるものではない。投写面300は、筐体200から離れる方向において、壁面420よりも奥まった位置に設けられてもよい。 In the third embodiment, the projection plane 300 is provided on the wall surface 420 on which the casing 200 is arranged, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The projection plane 300 may be provided at a position deeper than the wall surface 420 in the direction away from the housing 200.

 第4実施形態では、筐体200が配置される床面410上に投写面300が設けられるが、実施形態はこれに限定されるものではない。投写面300は、床面410よりも低い位置に設けられてもよい。 In the fourth embodiment, the projection plane 300 is provided on the floor surface 410 on which the casing 200 is arranged, but the embodiment is not limited to this. The projection plane 300 may be provided at a position lower than the floor surface 410.

 実施形態では、光変調素子として、DMD(Digital Micromirror Device)を例示したに過ぎない。光変調素子は、透過型の液晶パネルであってもよく、反射型の液晶パネルであってもよい。 In the embodiment, a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) is merely exemplified as the light modulation element. The light modulation element may be a transmissive liquid crystal panel or a reflective liquid crystal panel.

 実施形態では、光変調素子として、複数のDMDが設けられているが、光変調素子として、単数のDMDが設けられていてもよい。 In the embodiment, a plurality of DMDs are provided as light modulation elements, but a single DMD may be provided as a light modulation element.

 なお、日本国特許出願第2009-224666号(2009年9月29日出願)、日本国特許出願第2009-235648号(2009年10月9日出願)、日本国特許出願第2010-041051号(2010年2月25日出願)、日本国特許出願第2010-042957号(2010年2月26日出願)の全内容が、参照により、本願明細書に組み込まれている。 Note that Japanese Patent Application No. 2009-224666 (filed on September 29, 2009), Japanese Patent Application No. 2009-235648 (filed on October 9, 2009), Japanese Patent Application No. 2010-041051 ( The entire contents of Japanese Patent Application No. 2010-042957 (filed on Feb. 26, 2010) are incorporated herein by reference.

 本発明によれば、スペックルノイズの除去及び輝度低下抑制を適切に両立することを可能とする光学ユニット、投写型映像表示装置及び拡散光学素子を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide an optical unit, a projection display apparatus, and a diffusing optical element that can appropriately achieve both speckle noise removal and brightness reduction suppression.

Claims (16)

 可干渉性を有する光を出射する光源と、前記光源から出射された光を変調する光変調素子と、前記光変調素子から出射された光を投写面に投写する投写ユニットとを備えた投写型映像表示装置であって、
 前記光源と前記光変調素子との間に設けられたスペックルノイズ低減素子と、
 第1モードと第2モードとを制御する制御部とを備え、
 前記制御部は、前記第1モードにおいて、前記第2モードよりもスペックルが低減されるように、前記スペックルノイズ低減素子を制御することを特徴とする投写型映像表示装置。
A projection type comprising: a light source that emits coherent light; a light modulation element that modulates the light emitted from the light source; and a projection unit that projects light emitted from the light modulation element onto a projection plane. A video display device,
A speckle noise reduction element provided between the light source and the light modulation element;
A controller that controls the first mode and the second mode;
The control unit controls the speckle noise reduction element in the first mode so that speckle is reduced more than in the second mode.
 前記スペックルノイズ低減素子は、前記光源から出射される光を拡散するとともに、前記光源から出射される光を透過する拡散光学素子であり、
 前記制御部は、前記第1モードにおいて、前記第2モードよりも高い拡散度で、前記光源から出射される光を拡散するように前記拡散光学素子を制御することを特徴とする請求項1に記載の投写型映像表示装置。
The speckle noise reduction element is a diffusing optical element that diffuses light emitted from the light source and transmits light emitted from the light source,
2. The control unit according to claim 1, wherein the control unit controls the diffusion optical element so as to diffuse light emitted from the light source in the first mode with a higher diffusivity than in the second mode. The projection-type image display device described.
 前記拡散光学素子は、前記光源から出射される光の進行方向において、複数の拡散面を有しており、
 前記制御部は、前記複数の拡散面が異なる動作パターンで動作するように前記拡散光学素子を制御することを特徴とする請求項2に記載の投写型映像表示装置。
The diffusion optical element has a plurality of diffusion surfaces in the traveling direction of light emitted from the light source,
The projection display apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the control unit controls the diffusion optical element so that the plurality of diffusion surfaces operate with different operation patterns.
 前記拡散光学素子は、第1回転軸を中心として回転する第1回転体と、前記第1回転軸と平行な第2回転軸を中心として回転する第2回転体と、前記第1回転体及び前記第2回転体に無端ループ状に巻き掛けられた帯状の拡散シートとを含み、
 前記帯状の拡散シートは、前記光源から出射される光の進行方向において、2つの拡散面を構成しており、
 前記制御部は、前記第1回転体及び前記第2回転体の回転に伴って、2つの拡散面が互いに逆方向に移動するように前記拡散光学素子を制御することを特徴とする請求項3に記載の投写型映像表示装置。
The diffusion optical element includes a first rotating body that rotates about a first rotating shaft, a second rotating body that rotates about a second rotating shaft that is parallel to the first rotating shaft, the first rotating body, A band-shaped diffusion sheet wound in an endless loop around the second rotating body,
The belt-shaped diffusion sheet constitutes two diffusion surfaces in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source,
The said control part controls the said diffusion optical element so that two diffusion surfaces may move to a mutually reverse direction with rotation of a said 1st rotary body and a said 2nd rotary body. The projection type image display device described in 1.
 前記制御部は、前記複数の拡散面のうち、1つの拡散面が止まるときに、他の拡散面が動くように前記拡散光学素子を制御することを特徴とする請求項3に記載の投写型映像表示装置。 4. The projection type according to claim 3, wherein the control unit controls the diffusion optical element such that when one diffusion surface of the plurality of diffusion surfaces stops, the other diffusion surface moves. 5. Video display device.  前記拡散光学素子は、第1拡散板及び第2拡散板を含み、
 前記制御部は、前記第1拡散板及び前記第2拡散板が異なる方向に沿って振動するように前記拡散光学素子を制御することを特徴とする請求項3に記載の投写型映像表示装置。
The diffusion optical element includes a first diffusion plate and a second diffusion plate,
4. The projection display apparatus according to claim 3, wherein the control unit controls the diffusion optical element so that the first diffusion plate and the second diffusion plate vibrate along different directions.
 前記拡散光学素子は、拡散度が異なる複数の拡散領域を有しており、
 前記制御部は、前記第2モードにおいて、前記第1モードで用いる拡散領域よりも低い拡散度を有する拡散領域を用いて、前記光源から出射される光を拡散するように前記拡散光学素子を制御することを特徴とする請求項2に記載の投写型映像表示装置。
The diffusion optical element has a plurality of diffusion regions with different diffusivities,
In the second mode, the control unit controls the diffusing optical element so as to diffuse light emitted from the light source by using a diffusion region having a lower diffusivity than the diffusion region used in the first mode. The projection display apparatus according to claim 2, wherein:
 可干渉性を有する光を拡散するとともに、可干渉性を有する光を透過する拡散光学素子であって、
 第1回転軸を中心として回転する第1回転体と、
 前記第1回転軸と平行な第2回転軸を中心として回転する第2回転体と、
 前記第1回転体及び前記第2回転体に無端ループ状に巻き掛けられた帯状の拡散シートとを備え、
 前記帯状の拡散シートは、互いに逆方向に移動する2つの拡散面を構成することを特徴とする拡散光学素子。
A diffusing optical element that diffuses coherent light and transmits coherent light,
A first rotating body that rotates about a first rotation axis;
A second rotating body that rotates about a second rotation axis that is parallel to the first rotation axis;
A belt-shaped diffusion sheet wound in an endless loop around the first rotating body and the second rotating body,
The band-shaped diffusion sheet comprises two diffusion surfaces that move in opposite directions to each other.
 前記光源から出射された光が前記光変調素子に照射されるように前記光源から出射された光を中継するリレー光学系と、
 前記スペックルノイズ低減素子として、前記投写ユニットの射出瞳面における光強度の空間分布を均一化する均一化光学素子とを備えることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の投写型映像表示装置。
A relay optical system that relays the light emitted from the light source so that the light emitted from the light source is applied to the light modulation element;
The projection display apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising: a uniformizing optical element that uniformizes a spatial distribution of light intensity on an exit pupil plane of the projection unit as the speckle noise reduction element.
 前記均一化光学素子は、前記光源と前記光変調素子との間に設けられており、前記光源から出射される光を拡散するとともに、前記光源から出射される光を透過する拡散光学素子であり、
 前記拡散光学素子は、前記光源から出射された光軸中心を含む中心領域と、前記中心領域の周辺に設けられる周辺領域とを含み、
 前記中心領域の拡散度は、前記周辺領域の拡散度よりも大きいことを特徴とする請求項9に記載の投写型映像表示装置。
The homogenizing optical element is a diffusing optical element that is provided between the light source and the light modulation element and diffuses light emitted from the light source and transmits light emitted from the light source. ,
The diffusion optical element includes a central region including an optical axis center emitted from the light source, and a peripheral region provided around the central region,
The projection display apparatus according to claim 9, wherein a diffusivity of the central region is larger than a diffusivity of the peripheral region.
 所定動作パターンで動作するように前記均一化光学素子を制御する制御部をさらに備えることを特徴とする請求項9に記載の投写型映像表示装置。 10. The projection display apparatus according to claim 9, further comprising a control unit that controls the uniformizing optical element to operate in a predetermined operation pattern.  可干渉性を有する光を拡散するとともに、可干渉性を有する光を透過する拡散領域を有する拡散光学素子であって、
 前記拡散領域は、可干渉性を有する光の光軸中心を含む中心領域と、前記中心領域の周辺に設けられる周辺領域とを含み、
 前記中心領域の拡散度は、前記周辺領域の拡散度よりも大きいことを特徴とする拡散光学素子。
A diffusion optical element having a diffusion region that diffuses coherent light and transmits coherent light,
The diffusion region includes a central region including an optical axis center of coherent light, and a peripheral region provided around the central region,
The diffusion optical element according to claim 1, wherein a diffusion degree of the central region is larger than that of the peripheral region.
 一対のレンズアレイと、
 前記一対のレンズアレイを周期運動させる振動付与手段と、
を備えることを特徴とする光学ユニット。
A pair of lens arrays;
Vibration applying means for periodically moving the pair of lens arrays;
An optical unit comprising:
 前記一対のレンズアレイは、
 焦点距離fを有する第1のレンズアレイと焦点距離f’を有する第2のレンズアレイとを有し、
 前記焦点距離fと前記焦点距離f’は、f≦f’を満たし、
 前記第1のレンズアレイと前記第2のレンズアレイとの間に絶対屈折率nの媒質が間挿されるとき、前記第1のレンズアレイと前記第2のレンズアレイとは、略(f+f’)/nの間隔を設けて配されることを特徴とする光学ユニット。
The pair of lens arrays includes:
A first lens array having a focal length f and a second lens array having a focal length f ′;
The focal length f and the focal length f ′ satisfy f ≦ f ′,
When a medium having an absolute refractive index n is interposed between the first lens array and the second lens array, the first lens array and the second lens array are approximately (f + f ′). An optical unit characterized by being arranged with an interval of / n.
 前記スペックルノイズ低減素子は、前記光源から出射される光が通過するように周期運動する光学ユニットであり、
 前記光学ユニットは、一対のレンズアレイを備えることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の投写型映像表示装置。
The speckle noise reduction element is an optical unit that periodically moves so that light emitted from the light source passes through,
The projection image display apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the optical unit includes a pair of lens arrays.
 前記光学ユニットに入射する光の発散角がθであるとき、
 前記一対のレンズアレイのうち少なくとも入射側に配置されるレンズアレイは、tanθ<d/4fの条件を満たすように、各レンズのレンズ直径dおよび焦点距離fが設定されることを特徴とする請求項14に記載の投写型映像表示装置。
When the divergence angle of light incident on the optical unit is θ,
The lens diameter d and the focal length f of each lens are set so that a lens array arranged at least on the incident side of the pair of lens arrays satisfies a condition of tan θ <d / 4f. Item 15. A projection display apparatus according to Item 14.
PCT/JP2010/066971 2009-09-29 2010-09-29 Optical unit, projection image display device, and diffusion optical element Ceased WO2011040479A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/376,704 US20120086917A1 (en) 2009-09-29 2010-09-29 Optical unit, projection display apparatus, and optical diffuser
CN2010800250990A CN102472955A (en) 2009-09-29 2010-09-29 Optical unit, projection display apparatus, and optical diffuser

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2009-224666 2009-09-29
JP2009224666A JP2011075651A (en) 2009-09-29 2009-09-29 Optical unit and projection type image display device
JP2009235648 2009-10-09
JP2009-235648 2009-10-09
JP2010041051A JP2011100093A (en) 2009-10-09 2010-02-25 Projection image display device and diffusion optical element
JP2010-041051 2010-02-25
JP2010-042957 2010-02-26
JP2010042957A JP2011180281A (en) 2010-02-26 2010-02-26 Projection video display device, and diffusion optical element

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011040479A1 true WO2011040479A1 (en) 2011-04-07

Family

ID=43826293

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2010/066971 Ceased WO2011040479A1 (en) 2009-09-29 2010-09-29 Optical unit, projection image display device, and diffusion optical element

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2011040479A1 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011161931A1 (en) * 2010-06-22 2011-12-29 パナソニック株式会社 Laser projector
JP2014085669A (en) * 2012-10-24 2014-05-12 Christie Digital Systems Canada Inc Light combining system
WO2015140980A1 (en) * 2014-03-20 2015-09-24 Necディスプレイソリューションズ株式会社 Projection display apparatus and projection method of projection display apparatus
CN106647128A (en) * 2016-12-29 2017-05-10 海信集团有限公司 Optical engine and laser protection equipment
CN106647127A (en) * 2016-12-29 2017-05-10 海信集团有限公司 Laser projection system
CN106707671A (en) * 2016-12-29 2017-05-24 海信集团有限公司 Laser projection system
CN106773485A (en) * 2016-12-29 2017-05-31 海信集团有限公司 A kind of laser projection system
US10025168B2 (en) 2013-09-24 2018-07-17 Seiko Epson Corporation Projector capable of reducing speckle noise

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10341054A (en) * 1997-06-10 1998-12-22 Nikon Corp Ultraviolet laser device and semiconductor aligner
JP2003098476A (en) * 2001-08-27 2003-04-03 Eastman Kodak Co Laser projection display system
JP2005301164A (en) * 2004-04-16 2005-10-27 Sony Corp Illumination device and image display device
WO2006095855A1 (en) * 2005-03-11 2006-09-14 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Image projector
JP2007286350A (en) * 2006-04-17 2007-11-01 Seiko Epson Corp Screen, rear projector and image display device
JP2007293187A (en) * 2006-04-27 2007-11-08 Seiko Epson Corp Projector, screen, projector system, and scintillation removal apparatus
JP2008191279A (en) * 2007-02-02 2008-08-21 Seiko Epson Corp Image display device
JP2009042284A (en) * 2007-08-06 2009-02-26 Seiko Epson Corp Image display device
JP4235769B1 (en) * 2008-03-28 2009-03-11 Necディスプレイソリューションズ株式会社 Projection-type image display device

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10341054A (en) * 1997-06-10 1998-12-22 Nikon Corp Ultraviolet laser device and semiconductor aligner
JP2003098476A (en) * 2001-08-27 2003-04-03 Eastman Kodak Co Laser projection display system
JP2005301164A (en) * 2004-04-16 2005-10-27 Sony Corp Illumination device and image display device
WO2006095855A1 (en) * 2005-03-11 2006-09-14 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Image projector
JP2007286350A (en) * 2006-04-17 2007-11-01 Seiko Epson Corp Screen, rear projector and image display device
JP2007293187A (en) * 2006-04-27 2007-11-08 Seiko Epson Corp Projector, screen, projector system, and scintillation removal apparatus
JP2008191279A (en) * 2007-02-02 2008-08-21 Seiko Epson Corp Image display device
JP2009042284A (en) * 2007-08-06 2009-02-26 Seiko Epson Corp Image display device
JP4235769B1 (en) * 2008-03-28 2009-03-11 Necディスプレイソリューションズ株式会社 Projection-type image display device

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2011161931A1 (en) * 2010-06-22 2011-12-29 パナソニック株式会社 Laser projector
US8801189B2 (en) 2010-06-22 2014-08-12 Panasonic Corporation Laser projector
JP2014085669A (en) * 2012-10-24 2014-05-12 Christie Digital Systems Canada Inc Light combining system
US10025168B2 (en) 2013-09-24 2018-07-17 Seiko Epson Corporation Projector capable of reducing speckle noise
WO2015140980A1 (en) * 2014-03-20 2015-09-24 Necディスプレイソリューションズ株式会社 Projection display apparatus and projection method of projection display apparatus
JPWO2015140980A1 (en) * 2014-03-20 2017-04-06 Necディスプレイソリューションズ株式会社 Projection display device and projection method for projection display device
US10257480B2 (en) 2014-03-20 2019-04-09 Nec Display Solutions, Ltd. Projection display apparatus and projection method for projection display apparatus
CN106647128A (en) * 2016-12-29 2017-05-10 海信集团有限公司 Optical engine and laser protection equipment
CN106647127A (en) * 2016-12-29 2017-05-10 海信集团有限公司 Laser projection system
CN106707671A (en) * 2016-12-29 2017-05-24 海信集团有限公司 Laser projection system
CN106773485A (en) * 2016-12-29 2017-05-31 海信集团有限公司 A kind of laser projection system

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20120086917A1 (en) Optical unit, projection display apparatus, and optical diffuser
WO2011040479A1 (en) Optical unit, projection image display device, and diffusion optical element
JP5495051B2 (en) Illumination optical system, light source device and projector
JP6744041B2 (en) Light source device, projector and speckle reduction method
JP5313029B2 (en) Projection display
JP5694362B2 (en) Projector device
CN109212877B (en) Optical unit and projector including the same
JP6380813B2 (en) Light source device and projection device
JP2010237311A (en) Projection video display device
JP5363061B2 (en) Single-panel projection display
JP5590628B2 (en) Projection display
JP2015184303A (en) Light source optical device and projector
JP5595297B2 (en) Video display device
JP2008122824A (en) projector
JP4017167B2 (en) Projection display device
JP2011180281A (en) Projection video display device, and diffusion optical element
JP2011100093A (en) Projection image display device and diffusion optical element
JP5317787B2 (en) Projection display device
JP2011141507A (en) Projection type video display device
JPWO2016125222A6 (en) Projector, functional filter and substitute glass plate
WO2016098859A1 (en) Optical unit and projector provided with same
JPWO2016125222A1 (en) Projector, functional filter and substitute glass plate
JP4827872B2 (en) Projection display device
JP2011075651A (en) Optical unit and projection type image display device
KR101315981B1 (en) Projector

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201080025099.0

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 10820594

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 13376704

Country of ref document: US

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 10820594

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1